en_tn/tn_2CO.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	ur4j				0	Introduction to 2 Corinthians Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians Opening and blessing (1:1–2) Paul praises God for his comfort in affliction (1:3–11) Interrupted travel plans (1:12–2:13) The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4) The person who caused grief (2:5–11) Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13) Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17) Qualification for ministry (3:1–6) Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6) Suffering and ministry (4:7–18) Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10) The gospel (5:11–6:2) Proofs of ministry (6:3–10) Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4) Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16) Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15) Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6) Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5) Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15) Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10) The true standard for boasting (10:1–18) Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15) Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33) Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10) Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13) Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18) Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10) Closing (13:11–13) Who wrote the book of 2 Corinthians? The author identifies himself as Paul the apostle. Paul was originally from the city of Tarsus but lived in Jerusalem. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Corinthians during his third time traveling around the Roman Empire (see Acts 18:1–18). After he visited them, he stayed in the city of Ephesus for more than two years (see Acts 19:1–10). From Ephesus, he wrote them a letter that we call First Corinthians. After he wrote that letter, and during the two years that he lived in Ephesus, he visited the Corinthians very briefly, but it was a painful visit (see 2:1). After this visit, he wrote two letters to the Corinthians. We do not have the first letter that Paul wrote, but it was a severe letter that may have grieved the Corinthians (see 2:4). The second letter that Paul wrote is this letter, Second Corinthians. He wrote it from the region of Macedonia after his friend Titus returned from visiting the Corinthians and told him how the Corinthians were doing. What is the book of 2 Corinthians about? Paul wrote 2 Corinthians to continue to help the Corinthians believe the true gospel and trust him as an apostle of Christ. He wrote this letter after Titus returned to Paul from visiting the Corinthians and delivering to them a letter of strong rebuke from Paul. In 2 Corinthians, Paul tells the Corinthians that he is happy that they have responded well to his letter. However, he still has instructions and corrections to write to them, and he continues to defend himself as an apostle who taught them the true gospel. Most generally, Paul wrote 2 Corinthians to strengthen his relationship with the Corinthians, to strengthen relationships between all Christians, and to help the Christians trust in and obey Christ more and more. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians” or “2 Corinthians.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth” or “A Second Letter to the Christians in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What was the city of Corinth like? Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea and in an important location, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. Therefore, many different kinds of people lived in the city, and there were many wealthy people. Also, people in Corinth worshiped many different gods, and their worship could include food and sexual activity. In this culture, Christians who did not participate in worshiping at least some of the many gods were often considered to be strange, and people did not want to associate with them. What were the issues that Paul was addressing in this letter? There are four major issues about which Paul wrote in 2 Corinthians. First, he decided not to visit the Corinthians again right away, even though that was his original plan. He wanted to tell the Corinthians that he had changed his plans and to show them that he was not making promises and then breaking them. Second, Paul and the Corinthians had a conflict or fight when Paul visited them. Paul wished to rebuild their relationship so that they could trust and care for each other. Third, Paul wanted to encourage the Corinthians to give money to help the believers in Jerusalem. Paul was collecting this money from many churches he knew, and he wanted the Corinthians to contribute generously. Fourth, some people were saying that Paul was not really a true apostle, and the message he preached was not the true gospel. These people were either visitors or lived in Corinth. Paul defended himself and the gospel that he preached against these people who opposed him. All four of these issues relate to one specific problem: the Corinthians were doubting Paul’s authority over and care for them. He wrote 2 Corinthians to address this primary issue, and he focused on these four specific themes. Who were the false teachers that Paul speaks about? Everything we know about the false teachers who opposed Paul in Corinth comes from this letter. So, we do not know for sure who they were. Paul refers to them with two especially important names: “super-apostles” and “false apostles.” Some scholars think that the super-apostles were some of the twelve apostles that Jesus appointed, while the false apostles were people who were not actually apostles but claimed to be. On the other hand, many scholars think that these two names refer to the same group of people: false teachers who claimed to be apostles but were not actually apostles. Paul does not carefully distinguish the names; this second view is probably correct. Paul implies that these false teachers were Jewish people who claimed to serve Christ (see 11:22–23). They claimed to have authority and power. However, we do not know what exactly they were teaching about Jesus. We do know that they claimed that their gospel was better than what Paul preached, but Paul tells us that what they were teaching was wrong. Part 3: Important Translation Issues What letters did Paul write to the Corinthians? Paul wrote at least four letters to the believers in Corinth. First, he wrote a letter related to avoiding sexual immorality (see 1 Corinthians 5:9). We do not have this letter. Second, he wrote a letter to the Corinthians that answered some of their questions and that addressed disputes within the Corinthian church. This letter is now known as First Corinthians. Third, Paul wrote a stern or “severe” letter to the Corinthians (see 2:3–4 and 7:8–12). We again do not have this letter. Fourth, Paul wrote a letter after his friend Titus came from Corinth and told him that the Corinthians had responded well to the “severe letter.” This letter is now known as Second Corinthians. About what visits to the Corinthians does Paul speak? While Paul does not directly mention it in 2 Corinthians, he first visited the Corinthians to proclaim the gospel to them. You can read about that in Acts 18:1–18. In 2 Corinthians, Paul briefly refers to his second visit to the Corinthians, which was “sorrowful” or “painful” (see 2:1). Sometime after this “painful” visit, Titus visited the Corinthians and then returned to Paul in Macedonia (see 2:12–13 and 7:6–7). He probably took Paul’s “severe letter” with him. This may be the same visit of Titus that Paul refers to in 8:6 and 12:18, although either or both of these verses could refer instead to Titus taking this letter, 2 Corinthians, to the Corinthians. Paul also refers to two visits that had not yet happened when he wrote 2 Corinthians. First, Paul has asked Titus and two unnamed fellow believers to visit the Corinthians, taking the 2 Corinthians letter with them (8:16–24 and 9:3). Second, Paul plans to visit the Corinthians for a third time (12:14 and 13:1). You will need to make sure that your translation uses appropriate verb tenses and forms for referring to these visits. See the notes on specific verses for details and translation options. How does Paul use irony and sarcasm? In many places in this letter, Paul uses irony and sarcasm. In these places, he says things that he does not actually believe to be true. Usually, he is speaking from the perspective of other people and saying what they believe to be true. He does this to respond to what other people are saying or to show that what other people are saying is foolish or silly. The ULT often indicates that Paul is using irony or sarcasm by including quotation marks around the words that Paul does not actually believe to be true. The UST often indicates that Paul is using irony or sarcasm by indicating that someone is speaking the words. Consider how you might present sarcasm and irony in your language, and see the notes for places where Paul is using irony. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) What does Paul mean when he speaks about boasting? In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In this letter, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. Paul thinks the best way to boast is to say great things about God and what God has done. However, in this letter Paul also boasts about himself, because his opponents, the false teachers, boast about themselves. He does not think that this boasting is the best way for him to be speaking to the Corinthians, but he does it to respond to his opponents and to show the Corinthians that he is a true apostle of Christ. He calls this boasting foolish. Consider how you might express both good, bad, and foolish kinds of boasting. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]]) What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.? Paul frequently uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for Christ, such as Lord or Jesus) in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) How should “brothers” be translated? Many times in this letter, Paul directly addresses or refers to people he calls “brothers.” The plural form, “brothers,” refers in general to fellow believers, both men and women. The singular form, “brother,” refers to a specific fellow believer, almost certainly one who is a man. Paul uses this word because he considers believers to be as closely united together as siblings in a family. Consider what word or phrase would best express both the reference to fellow believers and the idea that these fellow believers are as close as family members. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) How should “you” and “we” be translated? Throughout the letter, you should assume that “you,” “your,” and “yours” are plural and refer to the Corinthian believers unless a note specifies that the form of “you” is singular. Also, throughout the letter, you should assume that “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include Paul and those who work with Paul but do not include the Corinthian believers unless a notes specifies that the form of “we” includes the Corinthian believers. Some scholars think that Paul sometimes uses the first person plural to refer to only himself. Other scholars think that Paul uses the first person plural to refer to both himself and those who serve with him. There is often not enough evidence be certain of which meaning Paul intended. It is recommended that you preserve how Paul sometimes uses the first person singular and sometimes uses the first person plural. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Corinthians? In the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations with which your readers may be familiar to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) “in holiness” (1:12). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “in sincerity.” “a second grace” (1:15). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “a second joy.” “new things have come” (5:17). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “all {things} have become new.” “I see” (7:8). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “for I see.” Other ancient manuscripts have this: “seeing.” “and in the love from us in you” (8:7). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “and in your love for us.” “by this situation” (9:4). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “by this situation of boasting.” “so that he might buffet me, so that I would not become super arrogant” (12:7). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “so that he might buffet me.” “If loving you” (12:15). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “If I love you.” “[12] Greet each other with a holy kiss. All the saints greet you. [13] The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ and the love of God and the fellowship of the Holy Spirit {be} with all of you.” (13:12–13). Some translations divide these sentences up into 3 verses instead of 2: “[12] Greet each other with a holy kiss. [13] All the saints greet you. [14] The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ and the love of God and the fellowship of the Holy Spirit {be} with all of you.”
3	1:intro	tsh3				0	2 Corinthians 1 General Notes Structure and Formatting Opening and blessing (1:1–2) Paul praises God for his comfort in affliction (1:3–11) Interrupted travel plans (1:12–2:13) The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4) The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East. Special Concepts in this Chapter Comfort Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. Paul explains that believers experience affliction because they belong to Jesus. When this happens, the Holy Spirit comforts them. Then they are able to comfort others. Paul wants the Corinthian believers to know that he is not exempt from terrible persecution but that God always rescues and comforts him as well. He also wants them to know that God will do the same for them. Paul’s integrity Apparently, people in Corinth had been criticizing Paul, saying that he was not sincere and did not truly care about the Corinthian believers. Therefore, Paul refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical question Paul uses two rhetorical questions in 1:17 to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Metaphorical “Yes and No” In 1:17-20 Paul uses the words “yes” and “no” together to represent the attitudes and speech of a person who is unstable and easily changes his mind about what he wants to do. It seems that some people had been accusing Paul of being such a person, but he makes it clear that he is not. Instead, he imitates God, who is always faithful, and Jesus, who faithfully fulfills all of the promises of God. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Holy Spirit as guarantee In 1:22 Paul says that the Holy Spirit is the guarantee of all of God’s promises, including eternal life with him. The term “guarantee” comes from business deals in which a person gives some valuable item to another person as a guarantee that the first person will pay the full amount of money that he owes. Other words for this idea include “pledge” or “down-payment.” Paul uses this idea to explain that, because believers experience the blessings of the Holy Spirit now, they can be sure that they will experience all of God’s given promises after they die. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) God as witness In 1:23 Paul calls God to be a witness to his character, that he is being honest and faithful to the Corinthian believers. It is probable that Paul means this as an oath, in which it is expected that God would bear witness to what Paul is saying by dramatically punishing him or striking him dead if he is lying. Alternatively, he may intend that God will bear witness by affirming Paul's honesty to the Corinthian believers through the Holy Spirit.
4	1:1	mel3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Παῦλος & τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth”
5	1:1	f59u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	The word our here includes the Corinthian believers. The original has only “the brother,” but the word “our” was considered necessary for English. Use the wording that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6	1:1	mhg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀχαΐᾳ	1	The word Achaia is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7	1:2	heps		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ	1	After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
8	1:2	f6k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of Grace and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9	1:3	px2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10	1:3	xshp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	After blessing the recipients of his letter, Paul adds a blessing to God. If your people would consider it strange for people to bless God, then translate it as praise, since that is what we do when we bless God. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
11	1:3	k7dl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ	1	Father is an important title for God. Both God and Father refer to God. This phrase could mean (1) God is both God and Father to our Lord Jesus, or (2) God is Father to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father”
12	1:3	pg4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	Here, the possessive form describes mercies and all comfort as coming from God, who is their source. Both Father and God are the same person. Alternate translation: “the Father who is the source of mercies and the God who is the source of all comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
13	1:3	tksv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of mercies and comfort, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the Father who is merciful and the God who always comforts his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14	1:3	cen3			πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	Here, all could refer to: (1) time. Alternate translation: “who always comforts his people” (2) quantity. Alternate translation: “from whom every instance of comforting comes”
15	1:4	n2lc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν	1	Here and continuing through verse 5, the pronouns us, our, and we probably include the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16	1:4	ggj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ	1	This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God gives us afflictions and then comfort. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
17	1:4	tl0d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν, εἰς τὸ δύνασθαι ἡμᾶς παρακαλεῖν τοὺς ἐν πάσῃ θλίψει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of affliction and tribulation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the one comforting us whenever people afflict us so that we are able to comfort others whenever people afflict them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18	1:4	cxwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of comfort or would not use both the noun comfort and the verb comforted together, you could express the same idea by using only the verb. Alternate translation: “in the same way in which we ourselves are comforted” or “just as we ourselves are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
19	1:4	eh7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ	1	Paul uses the word ourselves to emphasize that we, even though we are weak human beings, can comfort others as God comforted us. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “even we are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
20	1:4	hlnx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God comforts even us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21	1:5	nn5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks of the sufferings of Christ as if they were objects that could increase and move toward him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “For just as people made Christ suffer, and they are now making us suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22	1:5	tg9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν	2	Here Paul speaks of comfort as if it were an object that could increase in size. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God comforts us abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23	1:6	y9bi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1	Here and through the first half of verse 21, the word we and other first-person pronouns refer to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
24	1:6	bbff			εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1	There is no strong contrast here. Rather, Paul continues to talk about suffering and comfort. If it is helpful in your language, you do not need to use a word here that indicates a contrast with what came before. Alternate translation: “If we are afflicted”
25	1:6	ylw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26	1:6	pxy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But when we are afflicted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
27	1:6	gfyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως καὶ σωτηρίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of comfort and salvation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted and saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28	1:6	wyj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
29	1:6	ujj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when we are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
30	1:6	w94l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως	2	See how you translated this same phrase earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31	1:6	mx46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὑπομονῇ τῶν αὐτῶν παθημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as you endure the same sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32	1:7	ot4d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, εἰδότες ὅτι ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because we know that you share in God’s comfort just as much as in the suffering, our hope concerning you is firm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
33	1:7	n3nl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And we firmly believe that you will endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
34	1:7	klvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	If your language requires you to specify the content of Paul’s hope, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “And our hope that you will remain faithful to Jesus is firm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35	1:7	a4vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of comfort, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in verses 5 and 6. Alternate translation: “God will also comfort you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
36	1:7	ca1o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “in the same way, you are partakers also of the comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
37	1:8	jqn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative word ignorant. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
38	1:8	lgs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν τῆς γενομένης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning the time when people caused us to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39	1:8	pr8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν	1	Here, Paul is speaking of tribulation as if it were a heavy weight that they had to carry. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were suffering so much that we thought that we could not endure it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
40	1:8	gu5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπερβολὴν & ἐβαρήθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it was excessively difficult for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
41	1:8	t4iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, so that introduces the result of what came before. Use a natural way to introduce a result in your language. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
42	1:9	lks3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν	1	Paul is comparing the certainty of death that they experienced to that of someone who receives a sentence of death, that is, an order from a judge that he must be executed. Alternate translation: “we were as sure of our own deaths as someone is who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
43	1:9	dttx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here the connecting words so that introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose that God had for Paul and his companions to feel that they would die is for them to trust in God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
44	1:9	i7up		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but instead, we would be trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
45	1:9	bu2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς	1	Here, raising the dead is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
46	1:10	x4kh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τηλικούτου θανάτου	1	Here, so great a death represents the terrible persecution that Paul and his companions were experiencing and that they were convinced would end in death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the jaws of death” or “such a deadly danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
47	1:10	eitn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ῥύσεται	1	The implication is that God will rescue Paul and his companions from similar dangerous situations in the future. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and whenever we are in danger, God will rescue us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
48	1:10	c2xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὃν ἠλπίκαμεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we trust God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
49	1:11	q17d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of supplication, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by praying to God for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
50	1:11	xftq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting words so that introduce a goal or purpose relationship. Paul presents the purpose of the Corinthians praying for him to be that many people will be thanking God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
51	1:11	h0u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων & εὐχαριστηθῇ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that many faces may give thanks on our behalf to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
52	1:11	oskx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων	1	Paul is using faces to represent people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the lips of many” or “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
53	1:11	bmze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα	1	This gracious gift is something that God will do for Paul and his companions in the future in answer to many people’s prayers. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of gift, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God will have graciously given us what we needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
54	1:11	dptz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ πολλῶν	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the ideas earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prayers of many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
55	1:12	kqv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἀνεστράφημεν	1	In these verses Paul uses the words our, we, and ourselves to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who serve with them. These words do not include the people to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
56	1:12	r9p8			ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν	1	The word boasting here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feelings of great satisfaction and joy in doing something well. Alternate translation: “This is something that we feel very good about”
57	1:12	c7mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν	1	Here, Paul speaks of his conscience as if it were a person who could testify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Please note that this alternate translation does not need the comma after conscience. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
58	1:12	hs5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of testimony and conscience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Please note that these alternate translations do not need the comma after conscience. Alternate translation: “our hearts tell us it is true” or “we are sure of it within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
59	1:12	xxc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἀνεστράφημεν	1	The phrase we conducted ourselves means that Paul and his companions controlled their own actions. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this idea. Alternate translation: “we acted” or “we comported ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
60	1:12	c2z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	Paul is using the world to represent people who live in the world, that is, people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
61	1:12	nc7o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁγιότητι καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of holiness and sincerity, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as people whom God empowers to obey him and to be honest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
62	1:12	c1bd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ	1	Here, fleshly represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
63	1:12	qej6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wisdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not according to what people naturally think is wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
64	1:12	ieqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what God tells us to do because he loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
65	1:13	c6t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	The word translated as For here connects this verse to the previous one as evidence that supports the claim that Paul made in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this evidence to the previous statement. Alternate translation: “You see,” or “As you know,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
66	1:13	h2f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	γράφομεν	1	Here Paul may be referring to himself with the plural pronoun we to show that he is only part of a group. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use the singular “I” here instead, as Paul did later in the verse. Alternate translation: “I write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
67	1:13	h21j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε	1	Paul is expressing a positive meaning here by using the two negative phrases, no other … but. If it would be helpful, you could use an equivalent expression in your language or you could express the plain positive meaning. Alternate translation: “For everything we write to you is straight talk” or “For what we write to you is just what you read and understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
68	1:13	vtx8			ἕως τέλους	1	This could mean: (1) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will understand everything that he is trying to say to them. Alternate translation: “all of it” or “fully” (2) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will continue to understand what he is saying to them until Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “until the end”
69	1:14	ma5m			καύχημα ὑμῶν	1	The word boasting here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in something good. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “your source of joy” or “your source of pride”
70	1:14	p1pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθάπερ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἡμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as you also are our boasting” or “just as you also are our reason to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
71	1:14	urdj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	2	This occurrence of ours includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
72	1:15	n5ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει	1	The word this refers to what Paul has just said in verses 13 and 14. Paul was confident that the Corinthians would understand him and that they would be proud of him (very pleased with him). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference clear. Alternate translation: “being confident that you were proud of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
73	1:15	ehdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confidence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being confident of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
74	1:15	xdb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρότερον	1	Here, before could mean: (1) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before going to Macedonia. Alternate translation: “before going to Macedonia” or (2) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before he changed his plans. Alternate translation: “originally” or “at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
75	1:15	ln3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting words so that introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for Paul’s plan of two visits was to give the Corinthians two times of grace or blessings. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
76	1:15	y432			δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε	1	The word translated as grace here can mean more specifically “gift” or “benefit” or “blessing.” Alternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice”
77	1:16	glgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δι’ ὑμῶν διελθεῖν	1	Here, you represents the place where the Corinthians live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to pass through your city” or “to visit you and then go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
78	1:16	mp6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	Paul is referring in a polite way to the Corinthians giving him money and food by using the phrase be sent ahead … by you. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to allow you to assist me so that I could continue on to Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
79	1:16	tk5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have you send me ahead to Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
80	1:17	ehze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	The pronoun this refers to Paul’s plan to visit the Corinthians two times. If that is not clear for your readers, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “to visit you twice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
81	1:17	zms7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην?	1	Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he did not change his plan to visit the Corinthians lightly. The expected answer to the question is “no.” If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I did not then act capriciously!” or “I did not become unstable.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
82	1:17	chy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1	Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he does not make or change his plans according to his own desires. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to the flesh, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
83	1:17	p0sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here, according to the flesh is an idiom that means “based on changeable human desires.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to what I happen to be feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
84	1:17	fq3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1	This could mean: (1) Paul would say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at nearly the same time. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ and ‘No, I will definitely not visit’ at the same time” (2) Paul would say that he would visit while intending that he would not visit. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ even though I was intending that I would not visit” In either case, he is denying the accusation against him, that he is unreliable. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
85	1:17	y41z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1	The words Yes, yes and No, no are both repeated for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “so that I would say both ‘yes’ and ‘no’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
86	1:18	icwz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	The connecting words here could indicate: (1) a comparison. Paul may be comparing the faithfulness of God to his own commitment to speak truthfully to the Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “and in the same way,” (2) a result. Paul may be saying that he is faithful in his speaking because he is following God’s example to be faithful. Alternate translation: “so, because of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
87	1:18	qutd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the term our word to refer to any message that he gave to the Corinthians by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
88	1:18	hmuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ναὶ καὶ οὔ	1	Here, “Yes” and “No” represents the speech of a person who says contradictory things. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “out of both sides of our mouth” or “one thing and then its opposite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
89	1:19	jmcj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word translated For connects this verse to the one before it as an explanation. If the connection between this statement and the previous one is not clear, you may want to use a similar connecting word here. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
90	1:19	hd2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ & Υἱὸς	1	Son of God is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
91	1:19	aqzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν δι’ ἡμῶν κηρυχθείς, δι’ ἐμοῦ, καὶ Σιλουανοῦ, καὶ Τιμοθέου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you use this alternate translation, you should delete the dash that follows it. Alternate translation: “the one whom I and Silvanus and Timothy proclaimed among you,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
92	1:19	ql6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σιλουανοῦ	1	The word Silvanus is the name of the man who is called “Silas” in the book of Acts and who was a leader in the early church. You may want to use one spelling here and put the other spelling in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
93	1:19	t98z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν	1	Here, the phrase combining “Yes” and “No” represents a person who is unreliable. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this in verse 18. Alternate translation: “wishy-washy, but, as we said, a rock” or “unreliable, but we consistently showed you that he is trustworthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
94	1:19	xmu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν	1	Here, the subject of the verb has been, represented by it, could refer to: (1) the proclamation of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “but our proclamation has been ‘Yes’ in him” (2) Jesus. In this case, in him would be translated as “in it,” referring to the proclamation. Alternate translation: “but he has been ‘Yes’ in it” or “but Jesus has been ‘Yes’ in our proclamation” (3) reality in general. Alternate translation: “but it has always been the case that there has been ‘Yes’ in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
95	1:20	h2xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί	1	This means that Jesus makes all of the promises of God come to pass. He guarantees them. Alternate translation: “Jesus fulfills all of the promises of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
96	1:20	h4uv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ & δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	Both occurrences of the word him in this verse refer to Jesus Christ. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use his name here. Alternate translation: “in Jesus … through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
97	1:20	lz2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a verb of speaking that in many languages this sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply this word if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ‘Amen’ is spoken by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
98	1:20	sqpx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we say the ‘Amen’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
99	1:20	hro4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, us includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
100	1:20	uuxh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς δόξαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that we glorify God” or “so that we honor God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
101	1:21	n5eq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς Χριστὸν	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the relationship of believers to Christ as if they were located in Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in close relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
102	1:21	tjc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χρίσας ἡμᾶς	1	The implication is that God has anointed believers with the Holy Spirit so that they can live for him. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having anointed us with the Holy Spirit to live for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
103	1:21	f4c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	2	Here, us probably includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
104	1:22	z43l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς	1	Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a visible mark of ownership on us. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having claimed us as his own” or “having shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
105	1:22	laq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν	1	Here, us and our include Paul and all believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
106	1:22	jcv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the Spirit as if the Spirit were a down payment, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a guarantee that he will also give us every blessing that he has promised to us, which is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
107	1:22	xe98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	Here the word hearts refers to the innermost part of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in our innermost beings” or “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
108	1:23	j8lc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν	1	The phrase I invoke God as a witness upon my soul could be: (1) an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “Now I swear to God upon my soul” (2) simply a statement that God knows Paul’s motives. Alternate translation: “Now I call upon God as a witness to my intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula]])
109	1:23	vrkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν	1	Here, soul represents the life of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “So may God take my life if I am lying, but he knows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
110	1:23	j15t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν	1	Here, that introduces a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for which Paul canceled his visit to Corinth was to spare causing pain to the Corinthian believers (see 2:1). Use a connector or phrase in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
111	1:23	xzir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν οὐκέτι ἦλθον εἰς Κόρινθον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you sorrow that I have not yet come to Corinth” or “that it was to keep from grieving you that I have not yet traveled to Corinth again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
112	1:24	hepi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὅτι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I do not mean that” or “I do not say that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
113	1:24	mrzw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κυριεύομεν	1	Here, lord it over is an idiom that means “act like the masters of.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we want to be in charge of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
114	1:24	hafq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κυριεύομεν ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, faith could mean: (1) what the Corinthians believe. Alternate translation: “we dictate to you what you must believe” (2) how the Corinthians relate to God. Alternate translation: “we are in charge of your relationship to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
115	1:24	lz4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	συνεργοί ἐσμεν	1	Here the pronoun we could refer to: (1) Paul and his companions, but not the Corinthian believers. (2) Paul, his companions, and the Corinthian believers. We recommend using the exclusive form here if your language marks that distinction, to be the same as the previous “we” in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
116	1:24	cyu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you will be joyful” or “to make you happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
117	1:24	kv47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, for connects the following statement as a reason for the previous two statements. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this statement to the previous ones as the reason. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
118	1:24	cih8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἑστήκατε	1	Here, stand firm means to be steady, resolute, or established. Alternate translation: “you are well established” or “you are strong and steady” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
119	1:24	xf2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & πίστει	1	Here, in the faith could mean: (1) “in regard to your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers are independent of Paul in regard to their faith. They are responsible only to God for what they believe and do. Alternate translation: “concerning your commitment to God” (2) “because of your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers continue to belong to God because of their faith, not because of Paul’s authority. Alternate translation: “because you trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
120	2:intro	hy3h				0	2 Corinthians 2 General Notes Structure and Formatting Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13) The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4) The person who caused grief (2:5–11) Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13) Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17) Special Concepts in this Chapter The previous letter In 2:3–4, 9, Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. “Grieving” others Paul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in 2:1–8. These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. The person who caused grief In 2:5–11, Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Aroma and fragrance In 2:14–16, Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see 2:14), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and his fellow workers are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just as smells spread, he and his fellow workers spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Paul’s use of pronouns In 2:1–13, Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in 2:11, where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in 2:14–17, Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) Paul’s travel In 2:12–13, Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in 7:5–7. Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]])
121	2:1	wh9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of what Paul said in 1:23 about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to spare them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
122	2:1	wpd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ	1	Here, the word this refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: not to come to you again in sorrow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what this refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use this. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
123	2:1	yz5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμαυτῷ	1	Here the phrase for myself indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
124	2:1	yrbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	τὸ μὴ & ἐλθεῖν	1	In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “not to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
125	2:1	ma6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here, the word again implies that Paul has already visited the Corinthians in sorrow. He does not give many details about this visit. It cannot be the first time that he visited the Corinthians, so he must have visited them again in sorrow sometime between when he first met them and when he wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “yet again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
126	2:1	hu8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν λύπῃ	1	Here the ones who experience the sorrow could be: (1) Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for all of us” (2) just the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
127	2:1	ij73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λύπῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sorrow, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “in a sorrowful way” or “in a way that makes us sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
128	2:2	jb50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul is avoiding the “sorrow” he mentioned in 2:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I decided that because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
129	2:2	q4aq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul refers to a situation that has not happened and which he intends to keep from happening. He refers to the situation using the conditional form to indicate what would result from the situation if it did happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to something that may not happen but that the author wishes to speak about. Alternate translation: “supposing that I myself grieved you” or “were I myself to grieve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
130	2:2	le34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ λυπῶ	1	Here, the word myself emphasizes I. Consider using a natural way to emphasize I in your language. Alternate translation: “it is I myself who grieve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
131	2:2	nb6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ?	1	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there is no one else.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then there is no one cheering me up, except the one being grieved by me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
132	2:2	mbbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος	1	Here the author uses the singular form the one to refer in general to people, particularly to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers in general to people. Alternate translation: “who are those cheering me up, except those being grieved” or “who are those cheering me up, except you who are being grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
133	2:2	mbag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this question to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is it not the one being grieved by me who is the only one cheering me up” or “is there any one cheering me up besides the one being grieved by me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
134	2:2	x2vr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
135	2:3	kxu2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1	Here Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between when he wrote 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter, so we do not know for sure. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter, which that said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
136	2:3	e7c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο αὐτὸ	1	Here, the phrase this same thing refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could be referring to: (1) what he just wrote in 2:1–2. Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
137	2:3	abty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐλθὼν	1	Here, the phrase having come refers to an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same time as I might not have sorrow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
138	2:3	v87i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ & λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sorrow, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
139	2:3	owzn			ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν	1	Here, this clause could indicate that it is necessary for: (1) Paul to rejoice in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy”
140	2:3	p4q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πεποιθὼς	1	Here, the phrase having confidence introduces a reason why Paul wrote the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
141	2:3	b6f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεποιθὼς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confidence, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “being confident” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
142	2:3	i5r6			ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1	Here Paul could be stating that his joy: (1) leads to the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy leads to your joy” (2) has the same source as the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy” (3) comes from the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy comes from your joy”
143	2:3	gmyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I am joyful, and so you are joyful” or “I rejoice, and so you rejoice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
144	2:4	p4n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation about the letter that Paul wrote to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
145	2:4	tl4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1	Here, the phrase I wrote again refers to the previous letter. See how you translated “I wrote” in 2:3. Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
146	2:4	oz8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ & πολλῆς θλίψεως καὶ συνοχῆς καρδίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of tribulation and anguish, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “suffer” and “distress.” Alternate translation: “as I suffered much and was distressed in my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
147	2:4	vs7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	συνοχῆς καρδίας	1	In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “anguish of mind” or “emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
148	2:4	d5vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων	1	Here, the phrase through many tears indicates what Paul was doing while he wrote the letter. The word tears refers to the act of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that a person is crying or weeping while they are doing something. Alternate translation: “with much crying” or “as I shed many tears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
149	2:4	y0t3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐχ ἵνα λυπηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε, ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “so that you might know the love that I have more abundantly for you, not so that you would be grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
150	2:4	uc77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λυπηθῆτε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, the Paul implies that “he himself” would do it. Alternate translation: “I would grieve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
151	2:4	g826		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην & ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “how abundantly I love you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
152	2:4	zw13			περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase more abundantly could indicate that: (1) Paul has “abundant” love for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “most abundantly for you” or “very abundantly for you” (2) Paul loves the Corinthians more than he loves other people. Alternate translation: “more abundantly for you than I have for others”
153	2:5	xomm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δέ	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast with how Paul did not want to “grieve” them. Here he addresses how someone has caused grief. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
154	2:5	xlxc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & τις λελύπηκεν, οὐκ & λελύπηκεν	1	Here Paul is speaking as if someone causing grief were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that someone has indeed caused grief. Alternate translation: “the person who caused grief has not grieved only” or “if anyone has caused grief, and it has happened, he has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
155	2:5	ln83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λελύπηκεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grief, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grieve.” Alternate translation: “has grieved people” or “has caused others to grieve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
156	2:5	j6bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐκ & λελύπηκεν	1	Here, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has grieved others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
157	2:5	d7fx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ λελύπηκεν	1	Here Paul could be indicating that the person has: (1) grieved Paul some, but mostly the person has grieved the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me much” (2) not grieved Paul at all but only the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
158	2:5	rvpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ μέρους	1	Here, the phrase in part indicates that only some of an action or group is involved. In this case, Paul could be using in part to refer to: (1) how many of the Corinthians have been grieved. Alternate translation: “some of you” or “part of your group” (2) how much the Corinthians have been grieved. Alternate translation: “he has partially grieved you” or “you also in part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
159	2:5	iva7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἀπὸ μέρους, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ πάντας ὑμᾶς	1	There are several ways to understand how the pieces of the sentence go together. You could translate the sentence so that: (1) in order that I might not burden all of you indicates the reason why Paul uses the phrase in part, which would refer to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “you in part, which I say so that I might not burden all of you” (2) in part and all of you go together, and in order that I might not burden is a parenthetical statement explaining why Paul says in part. Alternate translation: “in part—which I say so that I might not burden—all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
160	2:5	or46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ	1	Here, to burden someone refers to placing a heavy object on someone’s back. Paul could be using the phrase I might not burden to refer to: (1) how he is trying to avoid saying too much about the situation. In other words, Paul uses the phrase in part because he does not want to make his words too strong, which would make the words like a person carrying a heavy load. Alternate translation: “I might not say too much about” or “I might not exaggerate about” (2) how he wants to avoid troubling or distressing all of them, which would be like “burdening” them with a heavy object. Alternate translation: “I might not distress” or “I might not trouble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161	2:6	iy4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη	1	Here, the word This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew what the punishment was. However, Paul never states exactly what the punishment was. You should use a word or phrase that is as general as what Paul used. Alternate translation: “That punishment” or “The punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
162	2:6	g3eo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῷ τοιούτῳ	1	Here Paul speaks in general terms about such a {person}. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he mentioned in the previous verse, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see 2:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the person we are talking about” or “on that individual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
163	2:6	d7b7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τῶν πλειόνων	1	Here the phrase the majority implies a “minority.” These are some of the Corinthians who either did not agree with the punishment or who thought that the person had done nothing wrong. However, Paul does not give any information about this “minority,” so you should use a word or phrase that refers to most of the people in a group. Alternate translation: “all but a few of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
164	2:6	a7c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἱκανὸν	1	Here, the word sufficient could indicate that the punishment: (1) has been severe enough. Alternate translation: “is severe enough” or “is sufficiently strong” (2) has lasted long enough. Alternate translation: “has lasted long enough” or “can end now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
165	2:7	we1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς χαρίσασθαι	1	Here, the words on the contrary and rather indicate that Paul wishes the Corinthians to do now the opposite of what they were doing. Instead of “punishing” the person, Paul wants them now to forgive and comfort the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that naturally indicate such a change in behavior. Alternate translation: “in contrast, you should instead forgive” or “instead of doing that, you should change your behavior and forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
166	2:7	w4n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	παρακαλέσαι & τῇ	1	Here, just as in 2:5, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “comfort the individual … any” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
167	2:7	vpx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that excessive sorrow might not overwhelm such a person” or “so that such a person might not experience overwhelming and excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
168	2:7	i3dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	Here Paul speaks as if a person could be overwhelmed or swallowed up by sorrow. He speaks in this way to indicate that a person can experience so much sorrow that it controls and destroys them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that such a person might not be overcome by excessive sorrow” or “so that such a person might not despair because of his excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
169	2:7	me4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	Here Paul speaks in general terms about such a {person}. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he has already mentioned, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see 2:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. See how you translated this phrase in 2:6. Alternate translation: “the person we are talking about” or “that individual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
170	2:7	cgil		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sorrow, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “as he is excessively sorrowful” or “because he is excessively sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
171	2:8	r916		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Here, the word So introduces an exhortation that is based on what Paul said in the previous verse about “forgiving” and “comforting” the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
172	2:8	ii0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην	1	Here, the phrase for him could go with: (1) love. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm the love that you have for him” (2) reaffirm. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm to him your love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
173	2:8	yi2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς & ἀγάπην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “that you love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
174	2:8	vlmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸν	1	Here, just as in 2:5, 7, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual” or “the person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
175	2:9	oadd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word Indeed introduces more information about the letter that Paul wrote to them (see 2:3–4). It does not identify a close link with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave Indeed untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “As a matter of fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
176	2:9	lc78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἔγραψα	1	Here, the phrase I also wrote again refers to the letter that Paul sent to them before he wrote 2 Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in 2:3–4. Alternate translation: “I also wrote that letter” or “I also sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
177	2:9	pp4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἰς τοῦτο & ἵνα	1	Here, the phrases for this reason and so that both introduce the purpose for which Paul wrote the previous letter. Paul uses this repetition to emphasize his purpose. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, and if it would not emphasize the purpose, you could combine the two phrases and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so that” or “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
178	2:9	eebj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here, the word proof refers primarily to the results of a test or trial. In this case, Paul is saying that he wants to know how they did on the test, which were the commands he included in the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the results of a test. Alternate translation: “how you responded to my commands” or “your character” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
179	2:9	uzsx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a proof that the Corinthians give or provide. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the prove you provide” or “the proof from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
180	2:9	gs2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of proof, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “what you would prove to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
181	2:9	xw5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπήκοοί	1	Here, Paul does not state to whom they are obedient. He could be implying that they are obedient to: (1) him as an apostle. Alternate translation: “obedient to me” (2) God and God’s commands. Alternate translation: “obedient to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
182	2:10	r7ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development in Paul’s argument. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development or a conclusion, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Finally,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
183	2:10	o14x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾧ & τι χαρίζεσθε, κἀγώ	1	Here Paul could be making: (1) a specific statement about forgiving the person who “grieved” the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “to that person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (2) a general concluding statement about forgiveness. Alternate translation: “to any person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
184	2:10	uzvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κἀγώ	1	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “I also forgive it” or “I also forgive them for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
185	2:10	tzn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	Here, the phrase for indeed indicates that Paul is adding more information (indeed) that supports what he said in the previous clause (for). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “furthermore,” or “and in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
186	2:10	d9ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ὃ κεχάρισμαι, εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι, δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul includes the comment if I have forgiven anything in the middle of his sentence. Consider what may be a natural place to include extra information like this. Alternate translation: “for indeed, if I have forgiven anything, what I have forgiven is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
187	2:10	avqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι	1	This clarification fits with what Paul said in 2:5 about how the person did not “grieve” him but rather the Corinthians. Paul could be saying that: (1) he does not have very much to forgive, since the person only hurt him a little. Alternate translation: “what little I had to forgive” (2) he really has nothing to forgive, since the person hurt the Corinthians, not him. Alternate translation: “although I have nothing to forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
188	2:10	cbm6			δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase for your sake could mean that: (1) Paul forgives the person in order to benefit or help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “is for your benefit” (2) Paul forgives the person because the Corinthians forgave him. Alternate translation: “is because of you” or “is because you forgave”
189	2:10	b6uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the phrase in the presence of Christ could indicate that: (1) Paul forgives because he knows that Christ sees or knows what he does. So, he acts in a way that pleases Christ. Alternate translation: “as Christ desires” or “with Christ watching” (2) Paul forgives with Christ as witness. Alternate translation: “with Christ as witness” or “with Christ guaranteeing it” (3) Paul forgives as someone who represents Christ. Alternate translation: “as one who represents Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
190	2:11	xaoc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα	1	Here, the phrase so that introduces the purpose for which Paul and Corinthians should “forgive” others (see 2:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
191	2:11	xoaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan would not take advantage of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
192	2:11	z6no		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the first half of this verse about Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “because” or “inasmuch as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
193	2:11	m46t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν	1	Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “we are fully aware of his schemes” or “we are very knowledgeable about his schemes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
194	2:12	nh7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a new section. Paul has finished speaking about the person that he and the Corinthians should forgive. He now returns to the topic of his travel plans and why he has not visited the Corinthians (see 1:8–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or section, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” or “I wish to speak again about my journeys:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
195	2:12	l6vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν & εἰς	1	In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
196	2:12	c14o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας & ἀνεῳγμένης	1	This clause gives information that contrasts with what Paul will say in the previous verse about how he left Troas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this contrast with a natural form. Alternate translation: “and although a door for the gospel of Christ had been opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
197	2:12	a1ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης	1	Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for him to preach the gospel as if God were “opening” a door for the gospel. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul can go in and preach the message about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and an opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ having been given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
198	2:12	n9cr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. In this case, Paul could be stating that the Lord did it, or he could be implying that “God” did it in the Lord. See the note about in the Lord. Alternate translation: “and the Lord having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me” or “and God having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
199	2:12	vtg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the gospel that could: (1) be about Christ. Alternate translation: “the gospel concerning Christ” (2) belong to Christ. Alternate translation: “Christ’s gospel” or “the gospel from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
200	2:12	fcf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in the Lord to describe his union with Christ. In this case, being in the Lord, or united to the Lord, shows that the door was opened to Paul: (1) by the Lord. Alternate translation: “by the Lord” (2) so that he could continue to serve in his union with the Lord. Alternate translation: “in my union with the Lord” or “so that I can do what the Lord wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
201	2:12	m7x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Κυρίῳ	1	Here, the word Lord could refer to: (1) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord, the Messiah” (2) God generally. Alternate translation: “the Lord God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
202	2:13	rjy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	Here, the clause I had no relief in my spirit indicates that Paul was anxious or concerned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form or plain language. Alternate translation: “My mind could not rest” or “I was concerned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
203	2:13	k7k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	Here Paul does not clarify what he was concerned or anxious about. He clarifies later in 7:5–16 that he was anxious to know how Titus’ visit to the Corinthians went. The Corinthians would have made this inference, since Titus had already visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “I had no relief in my spirit about Titus’ visit to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
204	2:13	trp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of relief, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “restful” or “relieved.” Alternate translation: “My spirit was not restful” or “My spirit was not relieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
205	2:13	w79i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ εὑρεῖν με Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	Here Paul is stating that Titus was not in Troas, not that he simply could not find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that shows that Titus was not in the city of Troas when Paul visited there. Alternate translation: “as I found out that my brother Titus was not there” or “as my brother Titus was not in the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
206	2:13	xd5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	Here Paul speaks of Titus as if he were his brother (probably a younger brother). He speaks in this way to indicate that Titus is a fellow believer and that he and Paul are as close as if they were brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “Titus, who is like my own brother,” or “my very dear friend and fellow believer Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
207	2:13	wq6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς	1	Here Paul refers to how he said farewell to the people from Troas, but he also means that he left their city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having said farewell to them and departed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
208	2:13	j9je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the word them refers to the friends that Paul made in the city of “Troas” (see 2:12). Most likely, these people were fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom them refers more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the people from Troas” or “to my friends in Troas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
209	2:14	s6k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until 7:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
210	2:14	g39s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	τῷ & Θεῷ χάρις	1	Here, the phrase thanks {be} to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
211	2:14	qgok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word us does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
212	2:14	gpd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks as if God were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or triumphal procession to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and his fellow workers could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
213	2:14	so2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the triumphal procession. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the procession. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
214	2:14	l1nr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	Here Paul speaks as if the knowledge of him were an aroma, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills every place on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verses, in which Paul continues the aroma metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
215	2:14	tlqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an aroma that is knowledge. In other words, the possessive indicates what the aroma stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this knowledge is about him, meaning Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
216	2:14	ihbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of knowledge, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
217	2:14	lxlc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the word him could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
218	2:14	eq21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	Here Paul speaks as if God used him and his fellow workers to make God known in every place. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
219	2:15	cjjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” (2:14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
220	2:15	yfx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐσμὲν	1	Here, just as in 2:14, the word we does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
221	2:15	x6nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here Paul continues to speak about fragrance and good smells (see 2:14). He identifies himself and his fellow workers as a fragrance that comes from Christ and which goes toward God. By speaking in this way, he shows that we are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and his fellow workers and realizes that they represent Christ before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
222	2:15	b1k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Χριστοῦ εὐωδία	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the fragrance could: (1) come or spread from Christ. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by Christ. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
223	2:15	itc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς σῳζομένοις	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
224	2:15	ze7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις	1	Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
225	2:16	zrae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οἷς μὲν & οἷς δὲ	1	Here, the word translated as indeed indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word but introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see 2:15). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
226	2:16	pv6o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1	Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in 2:15. This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from 2:15 would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in 2:15. Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
227	2:16	t3vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἷς	-1	Here, the phrase to the ones refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase to the {others} refers to “the ones being saved” (see 2:15). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
228	2:16	dwk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ὀσμὴ	-1	Here Paul continues to speak about fragrance and good smells (see 2:14–15). He specifically explains what kind of aroma he and his fellow workers are. Those who do not believe think that the aroma smells bad, while those who do believe think that the aroma smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in 2:14–15. Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
229	2:16	ud2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1	Twice here Paul uses the words from and to with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) from indicates the source of the aroma, and to indicates the effects of the aroma. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) from and to together emphasize that the aroma is characterized completely by either death or life. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
230	2:16	yau5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of death and life, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
231	2:16	cdr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πρὸς ταῦτα	1	Here, the phrase these things refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in 2:14–16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to what these things refers. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
232	2:16	be6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός?	1	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers are sufficient since God works through them. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient!” (2) no one is sufficient. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
233	2:17	h7y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce: (1) an explanation of the implied answer to the previous question, which is that Paul and his fellow workers are “sufficient” since God works through them. Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (2) an explanation of why Paul and his fellow workers are like an aroma of life or death (see 2:16). Alternate translation: “We are an aroma of life or death because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
234	2:17	pmpz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν & λαλοῦμεν	1	Here, just as in 2:14–15, the word we does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
235	2:17	u7ui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ	1	Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to refer many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
236	2:17	yf8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	καπηλεύοντες	1	Here, the word peddling refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is peddling is trying to make as much profit as they can, whether by honest or deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
237	2:17	a5sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, the word word represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
238	2:17	ohh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the word that could be: (1) from God. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
239	2:17	u4iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ ὡς	-1	Here Paul uses but as to introduce a contrast with the many who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats but as to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast sincerity and from God. If the repetition of but as would be confusing, you could use but as once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
240	2:17	x86y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ εἰλικρινείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sincerity, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
241	2:17	f9x4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the phrase as from God indicates that God sent Paul and his fellow workers to speak the gospel. The word as indicates how they speak. It does not mean that they are not really from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
242	2:17	aizg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλοῦμεν	1	Here, Paul implies that they are speaking the word of God that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they speak more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
243	2:17	vpdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι Θεοῦ	1	Here, the phrase in the presence of God could indicate that: (1) they speak as they do because they know that God sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they speak with God as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
244	2:17	u2zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains how they speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they speak as those who are united to Christ. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245	3:1	mdwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀρχόμεθα & ἑαυτοὺς & μὴ χρῄζομεν	1	Here, just as in 2:14–15, 17, the word we does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
246	3:intro	f7rh				0	2 Corinthians 3 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) Qualification for ministry (3:1–6) Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6) Special Concepts in this Chapter Letters of recommendation In 3:1–3, Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]]) Letter and Spirit In 3:6–8, Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to written characters, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. Glory Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]]) Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face In 3:7, 13, Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in Exodus 34:29–35. Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation In 3:2–3, Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and his fellow workers. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. The “veil” After he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see 3:14–18). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However, Paul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “The Lord is the Spirit” In 3:17, Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse (3:16). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities.
247	3:1	um8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν?	1	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
248	3:1	fuds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here, the word again implies that Paul and his fellow workers had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
249	3:1	noiz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἢ	1	The word Or introduces an alternative to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With Or, then, Paul poses a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need letters of recommendation. He introduces this incorrect alternative to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Or with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
250	3:1	y8yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν?	1	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
251	3:1	syny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὥς τινες	1	Here, the word some refers generally to people other than Paul and his fellow workers. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people other than Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
252	3:1	ad1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to letters that gave a recommendation for the person who carry the letter. Many people in Paul’s culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “letters of reference” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
253	3:1	dygq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of recommendation, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
254	3:2	ty59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they themselves are the letter of recommendation for Paul and his fellow workers. This letter is not a physical document, but is written in their hearts, and all men can read it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (in our hearts) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
255	3:2	f8s8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐστε	1	Here, the word translated yourselves emphasizes You. Consider using a natural way to emphasize You in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
256	3:2	a7xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	Here, just as in 3:1, the word our does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
257	3:2	ygx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ἐνγεγραμμένη	1	With the phrase our letter, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a letter that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
258	3:2	v2e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	In the Paul’s culture, hearts are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that the recommendation from the Corinthians is not written down on paper but, rather, is a part of their relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “written inside us” or “expressed by our relationship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
259	3:2	ko7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνγεγραμμένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states in the following verse that “Christ” did it (see 3:3). Alternate translation: “that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
260	3:2	bu1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which all men know and read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
261	3:2	pzpz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη	1	Here, the words known and read express very similar ideas. It is likely that known indicates that people are aware that there is a letter, while read indicates that they know what the letter says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
262	3:2	dr5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the word men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
263	3:3	s717		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φανερούμενοι	1	Here, the phrase making known could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
264	3:3	aylw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a letter. Here, he states that this letter was written by Christ and administered by Paul and his fellow workers. He means that Christ is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and Christ worked through Paul and his fellow workers to do that. Paul then contrasts a letter written with ink and on tablets of stone with a letter written by the power of the Spirit and on hearts of flesh. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the Spirit, not by letters written with ink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
265	3:3	hlap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the letter is from or written by Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
266	3:3	wrk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
267	3:3	dsxa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase having been administered by us could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the letter. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped Christ compose the letter. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
268	3:3	bfsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, just as in 3:1–2, the word us does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
269	3:3	akc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
270	3:3	vyuh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word written from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
271	3:3	q96q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that Christ did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
272	3:3	qt5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μέλανι	1	Here, the word ink refers to colored liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
273	3:3	t5ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	Here, the phrase living God identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that God actually lives, unlike inanimate idols and other things that people may call gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
274	3:3	ana2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐν πλαξὶν	-1	Here, the word tablets refers to thin, flat pieces of stone on which people would write words, especially important words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the surface on which people write something important. Paul may be referring here to the tablets on which Moses wrote God’s commandments (see Exodus 34:1–4), so, if possible, use a word that could refer to those tablets. Alternate translation: “on flat pieces … on flat pieces” or “on plaques … on plaques” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
275	3:3	ih89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πλαξὶν λιθίναις	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe tablets that are made out of stone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “stone tablets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
276	3:3	u959		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe tablets that refer to hearts that are made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “tablets that are fleshly hearts” or “tablets that are hearts made of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
277	3:3	no25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	In the Paul’s culture, hearts are the places where humans think and plan. Here Paul states that these hearts are made of flesh, meaning that they are live, functional body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of living people” or “of what we think and do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
278	3:4	pyev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development in the argument. Here it indicates that Paul is moving on to a slightly different topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces a development in the argument, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
279	3:4	wy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1	Here, just as in 3:1–3, the word we does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
280	3:4	z7qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην ἔχομεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confidence, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
281	3:4	q0kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην	1	Here, the word such indicates that the confidence is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in 3:1–3. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that such refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
282	3:4	y72k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τὸν Θεόν	1	Here, the phrase toward God could indicate that the confidence is: (1) before or in the presence of God. In other words, Paul has confidence that God approves of him and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in God. In other words, Paul has confidence that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
283	3:5	knf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐχ	1	Here, the word Not introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about confidence (see 3:4). He wishes to clarify that the confidence is not based on human abilities but on God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
284	3:5	i7nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἑαυτῶν & ἐσμεν & ἑαυτῶν & ἡμῶν	1	Here, just as in 3:1–4, the words we, ourselves, and our do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
285	3:5	qye9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul does not state what they are not sufficient to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient in preaching the gospel from ourselves … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
286	3:5	e5e7			ἑαυτῶν & λογίσασθαί	1	Here, the phrase to consider introduces an explanation or elaboration of what sufficient from ourselves means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider”
287	3:5	tws9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τι	1	Here, the word anything refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
288	3:5	wi1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sufficiency, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
289	3:6	t785		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς διακόνους	1	Here, just as in 3:1–5, the word us does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us, who preach the gospel, … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
290	3:6	r5ea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and his fellow workers as servants who serve for the benefit of a new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
291	3:6	j8rd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
292	3:6	poyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1	When Paul contrasts letter and Spirit, he implies that letter describes the old covenant and Spirit describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy Spirit, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
293	3:6	dp6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος & τὸ & γράμμα	1	Here, the word letter refers generally to a message written using sound-symbols called letters. More specifically, Paul uses the word letter to refer to the old covenant, a written document. It could not change people like the Spirit can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
294	3:6	bdrz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a covenant that is given or mediated by the Spirit, not by the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
295	3:6	tc4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματος & τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα	1	Here, the word Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit … but God’s Spirit” (2) the spirit of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
296	3:6	q4at		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει	1	Here Paul speaks as if the letter were a person who kills others. He speaks in this way to indicate that the letter (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
297	3:7	lyf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
298	3:7	yzhq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if the glory of the ministry of death were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
299	3:7	rife		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a ministry that leads to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
300	3:7	du65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here, the word ministry could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how Moses administered the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of ministry. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
301	3:7	ut6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract nouns for the idea of death, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “the ministry that causes people die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
302	3:7	j1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it (see also Exodus 34:1). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
303	3:7	rx13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις	1	Here Paul refers to how God engraved or carved the regulations for the ministry on stones or tablets. Much as in the previous verse, letters refers to written characters, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in Exodus 34:1–28. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
304	3:7	r5p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
305	3:7	myms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1	Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God engraved the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s glory became part of Moses’ face, and the Israelites could not look intently at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in Exodus 34:29–35. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
306	3:7	s9zp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς υἱοὺς	1	Although the word sons is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
307	3:7	mh54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here the author uses the word sons to refer in general to all the descendants of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
308	3:7	enwt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1	Here, the reason why the Israelites were not able to look intently at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the glory of his face was fading. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
309	3:7	pqbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
310	3:7	ewkr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1	Here, the word fading could describe: (1) the glory of Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the ministry of this death. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
311	3:8	xxn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ?	1	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
312	3:8	wkvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	οὐχὶ & ἔσται	1	Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the ministry will only have glory in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the ministry will have glory in the future. He could mean that it only has glory in the future, or he could mean that it has glory in the present and will also have glory in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
313	3:8	wq1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the ministry that could: (1) lead to people receiving the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
314	3:8	dhs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, the word ministry could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how Paul and his fellow workers administered the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of ministry. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
315	3:8	bmme		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, the word Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
316	3:8	tcp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
317	3:9	m2ci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two ministries in 3:7–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
318	3:9	p7p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if the glory of the ministry of this condemnation were only a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
319	3:9	ufq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Here, the word ministry could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how people administered the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of ministry. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
320	3:9	k779		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a ministry that leads to condemnation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
321	3:9	tcxw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of condemnation and glory, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused people to be condemned was great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
322	3:9	if33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ	1	Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two ministries and to show that the ministry of this righteousness has much more glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the glory of the two ministries. Alternate translation: “then certainly the ministry of this righteousness abounds in much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
323	3:9	egmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a ministry that leads to righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
324	3:9	e5zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ.	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of righteousness and glory, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous is even more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
325	3:10	q8bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	Here, the phrase For indeed indicates that Paul is adding more information that supports what he said about glory in 3:7–9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
326	3:10	n4pe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1	Here, the phrase {what} had been glorified refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase surpassing glory refers to the new covenant that Paul and his fellow workers serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
327	3:10	t2dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
328	3:10	hmcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει	1	Here, the phrase in this part could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is not glorified. In other words, in this part introduces the way in which something that has been glorified can actually be not glorified. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) {what} had been glorified. In other words, the old covenant was glorified only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
329	3:10	es4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει	1	Here, the phrase in this part indicates that a statement is only true in part or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
330	3:10	d7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει εἵνεκεν	1	Here, the phrase in this part and the word because both introduce how or why {what} had been glorified is not glorified. Paul uses both elements because he wants to make his point very clear. If the repetition would not make the point clearer, and if using both elements would be confusing in your language, you could use one word or phrase that introduces how what was glorified is not glorified. Alternate translation: “because of” or “in comparison to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
331	3:10	pvbx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “what was much more glorious” or “what was even greater” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
332	3:10	f2mo			τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1	Alternate translation: “the glory that surpasses it”
333	3:11	grwl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
334	3:11	r7c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if the glory of {what} is fading away were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
335	3:11	ym37			τὸ καταργούμενον	1	Here, the words translated {what} is fading away could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing”
336	3:11	zwb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ καταργούμενον	1	Here, the phrase fading away translates the same word that Paul used in 3:7 to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was also temporary. See how you translated this idea in 3:7 and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
337	3:11	hm9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ καταργούμενον & τὸ μένον	1	Here, the phrase {what} is fading away refers to the old covenant, while the phrase {what} remains refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
338	3:11	wtht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
339	3:11	wrf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ	1	Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two covenants and to show that the covenant that remains has much more glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the glory of the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly what remains will come with much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
340	3:12	tnc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in 3:4–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
341	3:12	ib35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1	Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers act with much boldness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
342	3:12	j76k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
343	3:12	u5qa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα	1	Here, the word such refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in 3:7–11. In other words, the hope is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what such refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
344	3:12	rf9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	χρώμεθα	1	Here, just as in 3:1–6, the word we does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
345	3:12	zbff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χρώμεθα	1	Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that we do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in 3:7–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what we do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
346	3:12	b5ql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
347	3:13	fb59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς	1	Here Paul contrasts the boldness that he and his fellow workers show with how Moses could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and his fellow workers can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
348	3:13	p1y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου	1	Here Paul refers to a story in Exodus 34:29–35 that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a veil when his face shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in 3:7, where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, was disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
349	3:13	boui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς υἱοὺς	1	Although the word sons is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
350	3:13	pdnk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here the author uses the word sons to refer in general to all the descendants of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
351	3:13	vuyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	Here, the word end could refer to: (1) the result of the fading, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses’ face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
352	3:13	p5u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ καταργουμένου	1	Here, the phrase {what} was fading away could refer to: (1) the “glory” that shone from the face of Moses. In this case, Paul could also be implying that the old covenant would also “fade.” Alternate translation: “of the glory that was fading from his face” (2) the old covenant, that would “fade away” when God instituted a new covenant. Alternate translation: “of the covenant that would fade away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
353	3:13	mczg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how {what} was fading away completely ceased or “ended.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
354	3:14	kb8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word But could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having hardened minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have hardened minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
355	3:14	csl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word their refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in 3:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun their refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
356	3:14	khkq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
357	3:14	zvf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if people’s minds were a soft substance that could be hardened, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their minds could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
358	3:14	tzbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how their minds were hardened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
359	3:14	w68p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1	Here Paul speaks as if a veil kept people from understanding the old covenant when it is “read,” and this veil is not lifted. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the old covenant with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a veil. Just as the veil kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a veil keeps people from understanding the reading of the old covenant. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
360	3:14	wcbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1	Here, the phrase not being lifted could: (1) explain why the veil remains. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, since it is not lifted” (2) describe the state that remains. Alternate translation: “the same veil is still not lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
361	3:14	wymg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα	1	Here, the phrase same veil could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see 3:13). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that hardened their minds. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
362	3:14	gg2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person reading the old covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
363	3:14	orvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης	1	Here, the phrase old covenant refers to the words that contain or describe the old covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
364	3:14	gl8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
365	3:14	vygf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, the word because could indicate why: (1) the veil is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted, because” (2) the veil remains. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
366	3:14	m7lk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains why and how the veil is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the veil. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
367	3:14	r1lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταργεῖται	1	Here, the phrase fading away is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses’ face (see 3:13). What Paul means is that the veil disappears or is removed in Christ. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in 3:13. Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
368	3:14	rhid		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καταργεῖται	1	Here, the word it could refer to: (1) the veil. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the old covenant. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
369	3:15	cv2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about the veil “fading away” in Christ (3:14). What Paul says in the rest of the verse repeats many of the ideas from the first parts of 3:14. Consider whether a contrast word or a connecting word expresses the idea most clearly. Alternate translation: “However,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
370	3:15	t3dl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς	1	Here, the word Moses could refer to: (1) the first five books of the Old Testament, often called “the Law” or the “Pentateuch.” Alternate translation: “the Law is read” or “the first parts of the Old Testament are read” (2) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are read” or “the Old Testament is read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
371	3:15	ip29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
372	3:15	bb5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται	1	Here Paul continues to refer to a veil that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in 3:14. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
373	3:15	gwp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1	In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
374	3:15	z5zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word heart is a singular noun that refers to the “hearts” of many people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
375	3:15	lmu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word their could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of Moses without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in 3:14: the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites’ heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
376	3:16	k2dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον	1	Here, the phrase turn to the Lord refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
377	3:16	aqna		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπιστρέψῃ	1	Here, the word one refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
378	3:16	wawh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Κύριον	1	Here, the word Lord could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
379	3:16	mibm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα	1	Here Paul continues to refer to a veil that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in 3:14–15. Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil were taken away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
380	3:16	w1y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
381	3:17	lrxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
382	3:17	ulmp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου	1	Here, just as in 3:16, the word Lord could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in 3:16. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
383	3:17	erpi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμά & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Here, the word Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
384	3:17	f2o7			ὁ & Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in 3:16 is the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the Lord as the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the Lord is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit”
385	3:17	sp81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία	1	Here Paul speaks of the Spirit being in a place, and so freedom also is in that place. Here he speaks in this way to connect the Spirit and freedom. He means that whoever has the Spirit also has freedom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
386	3:17	b016		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the Spirit as belonging to or part of the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit, who is the Lord, is” or “the Spirit, who belongs to the Lord, is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
387	3:17	uoss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλευθερία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of freedom, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
388	3:17	ao12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλευθερία	1	Here Paul does not give any details about from or for what people experience freedom. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the freedom, it could be freedom (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
389	3:18	r6rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in 3:12–17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
390	3:18	l3xw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι	1	Here the author speaks as if believers do not have a veil over their faces and can thus reflect God’s glory. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see God’s glory directly without a veil. Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
391	3:18	ui8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατοπτριζόμενοι	1	Here, the word translated reflecting could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
392	3:18	mdu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
393	3:18	brpu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Κυρίου	1	Here, just as in 3:16–17, the word Lord could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
394	3:18	rc9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μεταμορφούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
395	3:18	cq3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα	1	Here, the phrase the same image refers to the image that belongs to the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “into that image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
396	3:18	g0ku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα & ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of image and glory, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
397	3:18	bx5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν	1	Here Paul uses the words from and to with the same word, much as he did in 2:16. He could be using this form because: (1) from indicates the source of the transformation, and to indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) from and to together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by glory. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
398	3:18	mw3v			καθάπερ ἀπὸ	1	Here, the phrase just as from indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by”
399	3:18	wlp1			Κυρίου, Πνεύματος	1	Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the Lord as the Spirit, as he did in 3:17. Just as in that verse, he could mean that the Lord is the Spirit, or he could mean that the Lord is experienced as the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in 3:17. Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the Lord to whom the Spirit belongs or who sends the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit”
400	3:18	mmdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματος	1	Here, the word Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
401	4:intro	rx1c				0	2 Corinthians 4 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6) Suffering and ministry (4:7–18) Special Concepts in this Chapter Life and death In 4:7–14, Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience death or dying, he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience life or being raised, he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from death when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Light and darkness In 4:3–6, Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as veiling, blinding, and darkness. He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as shining and light. These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]]) “Outer” and “inner” man In 4:16, Paul refers to two different parts of himself and his fellow workers: their inner man and their outer man. The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the inner is connected to what is not seen, and the outer is connected to what is seen (see 4:18). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) The contrasts in 4:8–12. In these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English.
402	4:1	lyi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in 3:4–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
403	4:1	ln4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1	Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not become discouraged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
404	4:1	h1ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν	1	Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and his fellow workers received the ministry. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and his fellow workers receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
405	4:1	que0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἠλεήθημεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
406	4:1	ix7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν	1	Here, the word discouraged could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
407	4:2	yp4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word Instead introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse (4:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
408	4:2	z4c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης	1	Here, the phrase shameful hidden things could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are shameful. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both hidden and shameful. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
409	4:2	ey75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ περιπατοῦντες	1	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if people were walking in something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
410	4:2	vvzc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πανουργίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of craftiness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
411	4:2	gcqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a word that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
412	4:2	gp3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, the word word represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
413	4:2	mrri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a manifestation that reveals the truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
414	4:2	e7y7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of manifestation and truth, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
415	4:2	aj24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the word man’s is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person’s” or “to man’s and woman’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
416	4:2	f6n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Paul refers to being before God to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are before God or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
417	4:3	lu2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse (4:2). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be veiled to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
418	4:3	m82q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & καὶ	1	Here Paul could be using even if to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
419	4:3	mti5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον	1	Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in 3:12–18. A gospel that is veiled is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in 3:12–18. Alternate translation: “it is as though a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
420	4:3	hz2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ & ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν & ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the veiling and instead refer to how a veil hides the gospel. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
421	4:3	e5yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις	1	Christians disagree over whether God causes people to perish or whether people cause themselves to perish. The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the perishing. See how you translated the similar phrase in 2:15. Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
422	4:4	m71d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1	Here, the phrase the god of this age refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in this age, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
423	4:4	ptb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a god who rules over or controls this age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
424	4:4	r6pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks as if minds were eyes that could be blinded or that could see light. If minds are blinded, they cannot understand something. If minds can see light, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
425	4:4	squ9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ	1	Here, the phrase so that could introduce: (1) the result of the god of this age blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of the god of this age blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
426	4:4	j1vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the light either is or comes from the gospel, and the gospel is about the glory of Christ. In this last phrase, glory describes what Christ is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
427	4:4	hj21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
428	4:4	fmaq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of image, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
429	4:4	tx9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how Christ functions as the image that shows what God is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
430	4:5	nvg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in 4:4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
431	4:5	ddw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν	1	These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
432	4:5	xvs8			Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον	1	Here, the phrase Lord Christ Jesus could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that Christ Jesus is the Lord. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord”
433	4:5	t8du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ Ἰησοῦν	1	Here Paul could be indicating that he and his fellow workers are servants because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and his fellow workers to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
434	4:6	nbpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces the reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not proclaim themselves but. rather, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
435	4:6	fy6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών	1	Here Paul introduces something that God said. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing Genesis 1:3, and he may also be referring to Isaiah 9:2. Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who declared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
436	4:6	rw5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
437	4:6	mukf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ σκότους	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of darkness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
438	4:6	d5x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως	1	Here Paul continues the “light” metaphor from 4:4. When God shined in their hearts, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
439	4:6	bj1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	In the Paul’s culture, hearts are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has shined on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
440	4:6	m6rf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word our could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
441	4:6	fkq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the illumination either is or comes from the knowledge, and the knowledge is about the glory of God. In this last phrase, glory describes what God is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in 4:4. Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
442	4:6	mpg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of illumination, knowledge, and glory, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
443	4:6	p736		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the glory that is in {face} of Jesus Christ contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see 3:7). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in 3:7. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shined on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
444	4:7	xe5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word But contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and his fellow workers are clay jars. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
445	4:7	xx2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν	1	Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a treasure, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were clay jars, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (the treasure) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (clay jars). If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
446	4:7	yzd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον	1	Here, the word this identifies the treasure as “the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ” (see 4:6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what this refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
447	4:7	nz0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν	1	Here, the word jars refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word clay refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
448	4:7	i1rs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the power as something with surpassing greatness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the surpassing greatness that characterizes the power” or “the surpassingly great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
449	4:7	u16o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of greatness and power, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “great” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how surpassingly great and powerful these things are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
450	4:8	ga9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
451	4:8	wqg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι	1	Here, the phrase in every {side} could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about being pressed in, but not being crushed. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
452	4:8	vhjn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ	1	Here, the word every indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
453	4:8	fi9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were physically being pressed in by other people but not being crushed by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
454	4:9	bz8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects for persecuted and thrown down, or you could indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
455	4:9	uvq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταβαλλόμενοι	1	Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and his fellow workers so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and his fellow workers, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
456	4:10	zt4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες	1	Here Paul speaks as if the dying of Jesus were an object that he and his fellow workers could carry around. He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the dying of Jesus. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and his fellow workers proclaim the dying of Jesus both by what they say and what they do (in the body). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
457	4:10	ethc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word body is a singular noun that refers to the bodies of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies”
458	4:10	rnup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the dying that Jesus experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
459	4:10	l6f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ	1	Here, the revelation of the life of Jesus in our body could mean that: (1) the life that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they reveal the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by carrying around Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have life from Jesus. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
460	4:10	w3jc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
461	4:10	k10l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe life that could: (1) belong to Jesus. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from Jesus. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
462	4:10	j23j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
463	4:11	vivg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for introduces a clarification of what Paul said in 4:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
464	4:11	l1xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
465	4:11	ggb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα	1	Here, the phrase being alive identifies the situation in which the rest of Paul’s statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
466	4:11	ht74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀεὶ & εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were objects that someone could hand over to death. He means that they are under the power of death or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
467	4:11	admc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς θάνατον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
468	4:11	wt5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ Ἰησοῦν	1	Here, the phrase for the sake of Jesus could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers are always being handed over to death: (1) to serve Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of Jesus, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
469	4:11	d1wm			ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of 4:10. You should express the idea much as you did in that verse.
470	4:11	ww5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
471	4:11	r513		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
472	4:11	kucp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase mortal flesh refers to people who will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
473	4:12	dc7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the phrase So then introduces a conclusion that is based on 4:7–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
474	4:12	q3il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks of death and life as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those will experience things related to death, while the Corinthians experience things related to life. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
475	4:12	r5se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of death and life, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
476	4:12	n7or		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὲ	1	Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting death and life. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the death in them leads to the life in you. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
477	4:12	tvne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ & ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
478	4:12	albz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ & ζωὴ	1	Here, the word life could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
479	4:13	jqmm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
480	4:13	cckc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1	Here, the word having introduces a reason or cause for why we also believe and speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
481	4:13	ret6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως	1	Here Paul uses the possessive to refer to a spirit that could: (1) be characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause faith. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
482	4:13	wrr3			τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα	1	Here, the word spirit could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives faith. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit”
483	4:13	ery0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, the word same could indicate that: (1) this is the same spirit that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the same spirit that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
484	4:13	qma7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
485	4:13	gzf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
486	4:13	il5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	In Paul’s culture, according to {what} has been written was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see Psalm 116:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
487	4:14	sfxb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	Here, the word knowing introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and his fellow workers do (see 4:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
488	4:14	ruov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ ἐγείρας	1	Here, the word one refers to God the Father, who raised Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
489	4:14	t2i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς & ἐγερεῖ	1	Paul uses the words raised and raise to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
490	4:14	zd0j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σὺν Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the phrase with Jesus could indicate that the Paul and his fellow workers will: (1) be where Jesus is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as Jesus was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with Jesus. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
491	4:15	w37z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in 4:7–14. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
492	4:15	v7sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ & πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase all these things refers to everything that Paul and his fellow workers do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see 4:7–12) and the message that they preach (see 4:13–14). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
493	4:15	wl88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ χάρις	1	Here Paul implies that the grace comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
494	4:15	lg1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
495	4:15	xdxk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῶν πλειόνων	1	Here, the phrase through more and more could indicate that: (1) the grace increases by being received by more people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the grace increases because God uses more situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
496	4:15	u8pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of thanksgiving and glory, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
497	4:15	zt5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe glory that God receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
498	4:16	u6e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Here, the word So introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in 4:7–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
499	4:16	p7pv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν	1	See you how translated the word discouraged in 4:1. It could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
500	4:16	cb92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	1	Here Paul is speaking as if our outer man is decaying were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that our outer man is indeed decaying. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
501	4:16	hhv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος	1	Here, the phrase outer man refers to the part of the person that others can observe and see. It includes the physical part of the person, but it is not only a person’s body. Alternate translation: “our observable self” or “our external part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
502	4:16	pnms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος & ἔσω	1	Although the word man is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
503	4:16	jcra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται & ἔσω & ἀνακαινοῦται	1	Here the author is speaking of outer and inner men in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to men or people in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed”
504	4:16	vliu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διαφθείρεται	1	Here Paul speaks as if the outer man were a dead thing that was decaying. He speaks in this way to indicate that the outer man is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
505	4:16	s9b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase inner {man} could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
506	4:16	zct5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
507	4:17	no4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not become discouraged (see 4:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
508	4:17	e4s0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of affliction, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
509	4:17	pd63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως & αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης	1	Here Paul describes affliction and glory as if they were objects that could be light or have weight. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the affliction is compared with how important or significant the glory is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
510	4:17	jzhi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks as if the affliction were a process that was producing the glory. He means that the affliction leads to glory for us. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
511	4:17	qv6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an eternal weight that is made up of glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an eternal weight that is glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
512	4:17	xg92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of what is great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
513	4:17	na9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν	1	Here, the phrase far beyond all comparison identifies something that is much greater than anything else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies something that is greatest or most amazing. Alternate translation: “that is greater than anything” or “that is the greatest of all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
514	4:18	thyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ σκοπούντων ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase We are not watching could introduce: (1) a result or inference from what Paul said about “affliction” and “glory” in 4:17. Alternate translation: “Therefore, we are not watching” (2) what Paul does while he experiences the “affliction” he mentions in 4:17. Alternate translation: “That is true while we are not watching” (3) the reason why the “affliction” leads to “glory” in 4:17. Alternate translation: “That is true because we are not watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
515	4:18	fp4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ σκοπούντων	1	Here, the word watching refers specifically to focusing on something or paying close attention to something. It does not require the attention or focus to be visual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to non-visual focus or attention. Alternate translation: “are not focusing on” or “are not concentrating on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
516	4:18	t2fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “the things that people see, but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
517	4:18	f97x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
518	4:18	hbrg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why We are watching the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
519	4:18	kx7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
520	5:intro	s14p				0	2 Corinthians 5 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10) The gospel (5:11–6:2) Special Concepts in this Chapter Resurrection bodies In 5:1–5, Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and his fellow workers groan while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and his fellow workers do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. The intermediate state? In 5:6–9, Paul speaks about being away from the body and with the Lord. As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. New creation In 5:17, Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]]) Reconciliation In 5:18–20, Paul speaks about how God reconciles people to himself and gives the ministry of reconciliation to Paul and his fellow workers. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Bodies as homes In 5:1–9, Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/tent]]) Bodies as clothing In 5:2–4, Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The clothes are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (clothed), not without bodies (naked or unclothed). He does not use clothing language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the clothing language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together home and clothing language would be confusing, you may need to use only the home language and express the clothing language plainly or as home language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and his fellow workers without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) Singular nouns in general statements In 5:1–10, Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” Translating 5:21 Paul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “exchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “exchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes.
521	5:1	p7b7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce: (1) an explanation of what Paul said in 4:18. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in 4:18. Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in 4:18. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
522	5:1	v03z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words we and our could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
523	5:1	la71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	Here, the word if could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
524	5:1	z4vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a house, tent, or building in which that the person lives. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a tent that is torn down, because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a building from God and an eternal house that is not made with hands. This is an important metaphor in 5:1–9, so preserve the house, tent, and building language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify the house in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
525	5:1	zy2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
526	5:1	bvz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους	1	Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the earthly house as a tent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
527	5:1	gz3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον	1	Here and throughout 5:1–8, Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
528	5:1	xifl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here Paul refers to how the eternal house can be found in the heavens. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate heavens with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
529	5:1	bqi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀχειροποίητον	1	Here, the word hands refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that hands refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
530	5:1	bbvr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀχειροποίητον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
531	5:2	mt4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	Here, the phrase For indeed indicates that Paul is adding more information (indeed) that supports what he said in the previous verse (For). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
532	5:2	tc2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτῳ	1	Here, the phrase in this could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the person’s current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
533	5:2	yg6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες	1	Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in 5:1. Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were pieces of clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
534	5:2	ss6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
535	5:3	bjau		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα	1	Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in 5:2. Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
536	5:3	da0z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ γε & ἐνδυσάμενοι	1	Here Paul is speaking as if having clothed ourselves were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
537	5:3	i4es			ἐνδυσάμενοι	1	Here Paul could mean that: (1) we clothe ourselves. Alternate translation: “we clothe ourselves” (2) God clothes “us.” Alternate translation: “God clothes us”
538	5:3	ap7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & εὑρεθησόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being naked rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for found. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
539	5:4	zvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	Here, the phrase For indeed indicates that Paul is adding more information (indeed) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (For). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
540	5:4	bz6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in 5:1–3. Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
541	5:4	e34b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βαρούμενοι	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the tent, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people’s situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
542	5:4	g9yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαρούμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the tent (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
543	5:4	f8rb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being unclothed or clothed rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for unclothed and clothed. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
544	5:4	nezo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
545	5:4	n78p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ θνητὸν	1	Paul is using the adjective mortal as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are mortal. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
546	5:4	e5zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
547	5:4	de2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταποθῇ	1	Here Paul refers to the mortal as if it were food that could be swallowed up. This illustrates that the mortal has been defeated as surely as if life devoured it as food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may be destroyed” or “may be taken over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
548	5:4	y0db		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live” or an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “what is alive” or “what lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
549	5:5	x35l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
550	5:5	m2id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατεργασάμενος ἡμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase having prepared could refer to how God: (1) has acted in believers’ lives to get them ready for resurrection and new life. Alternate translation: “having gotten us ready” (2) created believers when they first began to live. Alternate translation: “having created” or “having made us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
551	5:5	xr9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1	Here, the phrase this very thing refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about receiving a new body in place of the one that people have now (see 5:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “receiving resurrection bodies” or “this new life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
552	5:5	n20x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὁ δοὺς	1	Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
553	5:5	g7yj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the Spirit as if he were a down payment, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:22. Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
554	5:5	kyyw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to the down payment as the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
555	5:6	clh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in 5:1–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
556	5:6	xjg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ εἰδότες	1	Here, the word and could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also knowing” (2) a reason why they are courageous. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are courageous. Alternate translation: “even though we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
557	5:6	bde4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	θαρροῦντες & πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου;	1	Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of 5:8, he repeats the word that is translated courageous here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
558	5:6	xv3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here Paul continues to refer to the body as if it were a building that a person could be at home in. Express the idea as you did in 5:1–2. Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
559	5:6	ebl4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σώματι	1	Paul implies that this body is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
560	5:7	w885		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for introduces an explanation of what it means to be “away from the Lord” (see 5:6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “that means that” or “thus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
561	5:7	rfn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦμεν	1	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we act” or “we live our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
562	5:7	wok7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and sight, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “see.” Alternate translation: “by believing, not by seeing” or “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
563	5:7	n9el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους	1	Here, the words faith and sight could refer to: (1) the acts of “believing” or “seeing” Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus, not by seeing him” (2) what is “believed” or “seen.” Alternate translation: “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
564	5:8	iq0j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces again what Paul started speaking about in 5:16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
565	5:8	npio		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word and could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are confident. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are confident about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
566	5:8	a6au			εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον	1	Alternate translation: “would prefer”
567	5:8	i3m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	Here Paul continues to refer to the body as if it were a building in which a person could be at home. Express the idea as you did in 5:6. Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home but to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
568	5:8	bca2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	Here, the word body refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase be away from the body could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still with the Lord. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
569	5:9	owmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1	Here, the phrase And therefore introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in 5:6–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
570	5:9	ml5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες	1	Here Paul could be referring to how people are at home or away from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
571	5:9	gadz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες	1	Here Paul continues to refer to a building in which a person could be at home. Express the idea as you did in 5:6, 8. Make sure that your translation matches or fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
572	5:9	j1sl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	Here, the word him refers to the Lord, that is, Jesus, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
573	5:10	k0qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
574	5:10	awq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς	1	Here, the word us could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
575	5:10	uv7o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we reveal ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God reveals us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
576	5:10	kdf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the phrase judgment seat refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will judge us all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how Christ will judge. Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
577	5:10	c499		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κομίσηται & τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος	1	In this context, the phrase receive back refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone will receive back as payment or recompense exactly what they did through the body. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
578	5:10	v8sl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that each one did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
579	5:10	cr07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ τοῦ σώματος	1	Here, the phrase through the body clarifies that the {things done} are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
580	5:10	nhwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν	1	Here, the phrase with regard to what things he did introduces what Christ is judging. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the basis of what things he did” or “being judged based on what he did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
581	5:10	izpv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἔπραξεν	1	Although the word he is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she did” or “that person did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
582	5:10	lsh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν	1	Here, the words good or bad could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they receive back. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people receive back. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
583	5:11	hszo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in 5:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
584	5:11	dzh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	Here, the word knowing introduces a reason for why Paul and those with him persuade men. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
585	5:11	pa4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify fear that is directed toward the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to the Lord” or “the fear that we experience for the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
586	5:11	e0c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “how we fear the Lord” or “what it is to fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
587	5:11	qm34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν	1	Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know the fear of the Lord as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know the fear of the Lord and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
588	5:11	b7dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast with how they persuade men. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already clearly known by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
589	5:11	v11v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα & πεφανερῶσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
590	5:11	qb7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι	1	Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is clearly known. He implies that God knows that Paul and his coworkers are faithful to God and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
591	5:12	r7sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
592	5:12	ufwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here, the word again implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in 3:1. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
593	5:12	c134		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an opportunity that is for boasting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
594	5:12	e6k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν προσώπῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of appearance, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “in what people look like” or “in how things appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
595	5:12	ikd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἐν	1	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
596	5:12	it2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν καρδίᾳ	1	In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in who they really are” or “in mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
597	5:13	ys3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about boasting in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways for the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
598	5:13	e4mp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε	-1	Here, the word if in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks have happened. He is not using if to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
599	5:13	cy57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέστημεν & σωφρονοῦμεν	1	Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
600	5:13	b4ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεῷ & ὑμῖν	1	Here, the phrases for God and for you could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
601	5:14	a5w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul acts in the ways that he does (see 5:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “We do those things because” or “We act in those ways because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
602	5:14	azi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe love that could be: (1) love that Christ has for Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “the love Christ has for us” (2) love that Paul and those with him have for Christ. Alternate translation: “the love we have for Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
603	5:14	gjmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note about whose love this is. Alternate translation: “how Christ loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
604	5:14	l1y6			κρίναντας	1	Here, the phrase having judged could introduce: (1) what he and those with him think about how the love of Christ controls them. Alternate translation: “and we have judged” or “as we judge” (2) a reason why the love of Christ controls them. Alternate translation: “because we have judged”
605	5:14	ig7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1	Here, the word this refers to what Paul is about to say, which he introduces with the word that. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both this and that confusing, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
606	5:14	nd9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εἷς	1	Paul is using the adjective one as a noun in order to refer to Christ, who is one person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase, and you could make explicit to whom one refers. Alternate translation: “one human” or “one human, Christ,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
607	5:14	crsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ	1	Here, the phrase for the sake of could indicate that Jesus died: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save” or “for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
608	5:14	trmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων & οἱ πάντες	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to refer to all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans … all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
609	5:14	ocra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	πάντων & οἱ πάντες	1	Here, the word all could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Since Paul did not clarify which he meant, if possible you also should use a general word that could be interpreted in either way. Alternate translation: “everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
610	5:14	nezi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον	1	Here Paul speaks as if all died because or when Jesus died. Since the following verse states that some people are still “living,” he cannot mean that every person has physically died. He may mean that people have died to sin, or that they participated in how Christ died, or that who they used to be died. Since some or all of these interpretations are possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in a form that could allow for several of these interpretations, such as in simile form. Alternate translation: “in a way, all died” or “all died in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
611	5:15	h831		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ	-1	Here, much as in 5:14, the word for could indicate that Jesus died: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save … to save” or “for the benefit of … for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of … in place of” or “instead of … instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612	5:15	b5d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to refer to all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
613	5:15	rbbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	πάντων	1	Here, just as in 5:14, the word all could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Express the idea as you did in 5:14. Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
614	5:15	s4yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ζῶντες	1	Here, the phrase the ones living could identify people who: (1) have spiritual life, that is, those who have received new life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones having new life” (2) have physical life, that is, who have not died. Alternate translation: “those who are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
615	5:15	bc7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ	1	Here, to live for a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
616	5:15	g9k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῷ	1	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
617	5:15	ri6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῷ	1	Here, the word one refers to the same person to whom he refers at the beginning of the verse, Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom one refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
618	5:15	h52q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθέντι	1	Paul uses the word raised to refer to someone coming back to life after they died. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619	5:15	aovc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτῶν & καὶ ἐγερθέντι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
620	5:16	ic21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to 5:14–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
621	5:16	f2ww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν & νῦν	1	Here, the word now could refer to: (1) the time when we believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
622	5:16	t1cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	-1	Here Paul uses the phrase according to the flesh to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions … according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value … according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
623	5:16	y8mk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	-1	Paul is speaking as if it were a possibility that we regarded Christ according to the flesh in the past, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word or phrase such as “although” or “despite the fact that.” Alternate translation: “Even though” or “Despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
624	5:17	yx28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the word Therefore could introduce an inference from: (1) 5:16. In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new way indicates that a person is also a new creation. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) 5:14–15. In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a new creation. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
625	5:17	khzj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ	1	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being in Christ leads to being a new creation. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the if statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
626	5:17	wark		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
627	5:17	af1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	καινὴ κτίσις	1	Although the word he is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
628	5:17	tl3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καινὴ κτίσις	1	Here Paul does not directly state what is a new creation. He could be implying that: (1) the person in Christ is a new creation. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a new creation, and the person can experience that when he or she is in Christ. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
629	5:17	rt67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καινὴ κτίσις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
630	5:17	ue8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ ἀρχαῖα & καινά	1	Here, the phrases old things and new things could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
631	5:17	vpe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
632	5:17	d7i9			γέγονεν καινά	1	Here, the phrase new things could be: (1) the subject of have come. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of have come, and the subject is the person who is in Christ. Alternate translation: “he has become new”
633	5:17	izkz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	γέγονεν καινά	1	Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
634	5:18	whyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces the development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
635	5:18	jyf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ & πάντα	1	Here, the phrase all these things could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in 5:17. Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
636	5:18	s1q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ καταλλάξαντος	1	Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
637	5:18	u66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a ministry whose goal or aim is reconciliation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
638	5:18	lj2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister, so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
639	5:19	o5j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὡς ὅτι	1	Here, the phrase namely, that introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in 5:18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
640	5:19	payo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ & καταλλάσσων	1	Here, in Christ could modify: (1) reconciling, so that God was reconciling by means of or through Christ. In this case, Paul is saying something about how God accomplishes the reconciliation. Alternate translation: “in Christ God was reconciling” (2) was, so that God was in Christ, and he was reconciling while he was acting in Christ. In this case, Paul is saying something about the relationship between Christ and God, namely that Christ is God. Alternate translation: “God was in Christ, reconciling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
641	5:19	sfrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Θεὸς & ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains the means by which God accomplishes the “reconciliation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that God “reconciles” people by uniting them to Christ. Alternate translation: “God, by uniting people to Christ,” or “God by means of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
642	5:19	w1d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κόσμον	1	Here, the word world could refer to: (1) the people in the world. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the world as a whole, including people, places, and things. Alternate translation: “everything he created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
643	5:19	joj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, καὶ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	Here Paul may have intended that: (1) not counting and having placed both introduce ways that God was reconciling. Alternate translation: “and he did that by not counting their trespasses against them and by placing in us the word of reconciliation” (2) not counting further defines reconciling, and having placed introduces an action parallel to reconciling. Alternate translation: “that is, not counting their trespasses against them, and he was placing in us the word or reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
644	5:19	mckq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if God could keep a “count” of people’s trespasses, which means that he would keep track of everything that a person did wrong in order to condemn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to keeping track of or condemning people for what they have done wrong. Alternate translation: “not keeping track of their trespasses” or “not using their trespasses to condemn them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
645	5:19	a1io		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν	1	Here, the words their and them refer to the people who live in the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
646	5:19	b62q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks as if the word of reconciliation were an object that God would “place in” Paul and those with him. He means that God has called or commissioned them to proclaim this word of reconciliation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having given to us” or “having called us to proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
647	5:19	om5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, the word word represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
648	5:19	ix97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a word about reconciliation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word about reconciliation” or “the word concerning reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
649	5:19	zuoe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “about how God reconciles the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
650	5:20	wg8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces an inference from what Paul said in the previous verse about how God “placed in us the word of reconciliation” (see 5:19). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
651	5:20	q9u9			ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ	-1	Here, the phrase on behalf of could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him represent Christ. Alternate translation: “who act for Christ … as those who act for Christ” (2) Paul and those with him act for the benefit of Christ. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ … for the sake of Christ”
652	5:20	uqy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς	1	Here, the phrase as though introduces the implication or meaning of being ambassadors on behalf of Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
653	5:20	lr70		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	παρακαλοῦντος δι’ ἡμῶν; δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, the clause We implore {you} on behalf of Christ could be: (1) the introduction to what Paul and those with him say as God is appealing through them. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us as we implore you on behalf of Christ, ‘Be reconciled to God!’” (2) part of what God is appealing through us. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us when we say, ‘We implore you on behalf Christ: be reconciled to God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
654	5:20	me5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρακαλοῦντος	1	Here Paul does not state to whom God is appealing. He could imply that he is appealing to: (1) everyone. Alternate translation: “is appealing to all people” (2) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “is appealing to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
655	5:20	eoef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεόμεθα	1	Here what Paul says could be addressed to: (1) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “We implore you Corinthians on behalf of Christ” (2) every person with whom Paul and those with him speak. Alternate translation: “We implore everyone we meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
656	5:20	t7be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “Christ that you should be reconciled to God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
657	5:20	a6fx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Corinthians do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Reconcile yourselves with God” (2) God does it. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
658	5:21	jp2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν & ἐποίησεν & ἐν αὐτῷ	1	Here, the words one and him refer to Jesus the Messiah. The word he refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who did not know sin, God made … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
659	5:21	qim8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here, the phrase having known sin refers to committing or doing sin. It does not refer just to knowing about sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to committing sin. Alternate translation: “The one not having done sin” or “The one not having sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
660	5:21	oxvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν	1	Here Paul speaks as if God made Jesus sin. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus as though he were a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made to be a sin offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
661	5:21	dmjk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase for us could indicate that God made Jesus sin: (1) to benefit or help us. Alternate translation: “for our sake” or “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of us. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
662	5:21	pix7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks as if people could become the righteousness of God. He could mean that we: (1) share the righteousness that God gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “we might share in the righteousness of God” (2) are declared “righteous” by God. Alternate translation: “we might be declared to have the righteousness of God” (3) become those who live “righteously.” Alternate translation: “we might act according to the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
663	5:21	kmt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe righteousness that could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to God. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
664	5:21	ebz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what righteousness of God means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
665	5:21	cypg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in him to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in him, or united to Christ, explains how people become the righteousness of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the righteousness. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
666	6:intro	f5qu				0	2 Corinthians 6 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) The gospel (5:11–6:2) Proofs of ministry (6:3–10) Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in 6:2 and 6:16–18. Special Concepts in this Chapter Commendation of ministry In 6:3–4, Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and his fellow workers “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in 6:4–10. Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and his fellow workers do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter “Weapons of righteousness” In 6:7, Paul states that he and his fellow workers have “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that righteousness: (1) is the weapons (2) is defended by the weapons (3) characterizes the weapons. Also the idea that the weapons are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and his fellow workers can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these weapons, but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. Opening the heart In 6:11–13, Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. The temple of the living God In 6:16, Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. Rhetorical questions In 6:14–16, Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter The long list in 6:4–10 These verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and his fellow workers commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” (6:4–7a), the second part uses the word “through” (6:7b–8a), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” (6:8b–10). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
667	6:1	kf1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from 5:20–21. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
668	6:1	tbr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεργοῦντες	1	Here Paul does not directly state with whom he is working. He could be implying that he works with: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
669	6:1	x4hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, we does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
670	6:1	s8db		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul uses two negative terms, not and in vain, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
671	6:1	wdla		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of gracious, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
672	6:1	pdgo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς κενὸν	1	Here, in vain identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving the grace of God will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received the grace of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
673	6:2	ooms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, the word for introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see 6:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
674	6:2	u9kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγει	1	Here, the phrase he says introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of Isaiah 49:8. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
675	6:2	pp3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας	1	The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
676	6:2	kilf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καιρῷ δεκτῷ	1	Here, the phrase an acceptable time refers to a point in time that someone considers to be a proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this time is acceptable to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
677	6:2	iz3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπήκουσά σου	1	Here, the word listened indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just listen but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
678	6:2	be7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σου & σοι	1	Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, you in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
679	6:2	z6w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας	1	Here, the phrase day of salvation refers to the time when God will bring salvation for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
680	6:2	qrdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
681	6:2	sa94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ, νῦν	-1	Here, the words Behold and Look draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
682	6:2	j4k4			καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας	1	Here, the phrases a day of salvation and a favorable time repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the time is good (favorable) instead of just being appropriate (acceptable). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although, if possible, use a word for a good time instead of just an acceptable time. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation”
683	6:3	shtt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διδόντες	1	Here, the word giving goes with the clause “we also urge you” in 6:1. It introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from 6:1. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
684	6:3	v3wc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν	1	Here, the phrase giving no cause for offense refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that would cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
685	6:3	sv9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν μηδενὶ	1	Here, the phrase in anything could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
686	6:3	he3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
687	6:4	p6pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι	1	Here the word as could introduce: (1) who they are (servants of God) while they commend themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must commend themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
688	6:4	p9up		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Θεοῦ διάκονοι	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer servants who serve God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “servants for God” or “God’s servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
689	6:4	faw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ & ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν	1	Here, the phrase in much endurance could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have much endurance. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) we commend ourselves. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they commend themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs. Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
690	6:4	xyf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of endurance, tribulations, hardships, and distresses, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “enduring at all times while we are persecuted, pressured, and distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
691	6:4	ndmv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις	1	Here, the words tribulations, hardships, and distresses function together to refer to many different kinds of persecution and suffering. It is possible that tribulations refers to direct persecution, hardships refers to being forced to do something difficult, and distresses refers to being unable to do what one wants. If you do not have three words for these categories, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one or two words or phrases to refer to suffering and persecution. Alternate translation: “in persecutions, in suffering” or “in every tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
692	6:5	ded3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πληγαῖς, ἐν φυλακαῖς, ἐν ἀκαταστασίαις, ἐν κόποις, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις, ἐν νηστείαις	1	If your language does not express some of these ideas with nouns, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in being beaten, in being imprisoned, in being mobbed, in working hard, in sleeping little, in being hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
693	6:6	w84c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁγνότητι, ἐν γνώσει, ἐν μακροθυμίᾳ, ἐν χρηστότητι, ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or adjectives. Alternate translation: “we are pure, knowledgeable, patient, kind, filled with the Holy Spirit, sincerely loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
694	6:6	e2lc			ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Here, the phrase in the Holy Spirit could refer to: (1) having the power or help of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the power of the Holy Spirit” (2) being “holy” in one’s “spirit.” Alternate translation: “in holiness of spirit”
695	6:7	b6am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and power, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the word about what is true, in God empowering us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
696	6:7	cr55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	Here, the word word represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
697	6:7	dui6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας	1	Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a word about the truth. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a word that is characterized by truth. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
698	6:7	p5l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe power that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
699	6:7	ef5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if righteousness were weapons for the right hand and the left. He means that the righteous way in which he and his fellow workers live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
700	6:7	gg43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe weapons that could: (1) be righteousness. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or be because of righteousness. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for righteousness. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
701	6:7	ozxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
702	6:7	ijr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν	1	Here, having weapons for the right hand and the left could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from right and left. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
703	6:8	ftu0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας	1	In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and his fellow workers persevere in serving God whether people think and say good things or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
704	6:8	m51w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of honor and dishonor, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
705	6:8	fedq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς	1	Here and in the following two verses Paul uses as to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then yet to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
706	6:8	e4pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀληθεῖς	1	Paul is using the adjective true as a noun in order to identify himself and his fellow workers as those who truly are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
707	6:9	niij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι	1	Here and in the following verse Paul uses as to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers, and then he uses yet to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
708	6:9	fcb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) unknown to many people but known to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) unknown to some people, but known to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
709	6:9	x7bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν	1	Here, the word behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
710	6:9	r1d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
711	6:9	nqcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ θανατούμενοι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die” or “kill.” Alternate translation: “yet not being killed” or “not dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
712	6:10	so04		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες	1	Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses as to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then yet or but to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
713	6:10	vydj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers made other people rich. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually rich. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
714	6:10	pajk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὺς	1	Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to refer many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
715	6:10	fpqg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα	1	Here Paul could be stating that they possess: (1) all things that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and his fellow workers also possess everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) all spiritual blessings, which are the important things. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
716	6:11	mv85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and his fellow workers did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
717	6:11	v74j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν	1	Here, the words mouth and heart are singular nouns that refer to the mouths and hearts of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts”
718	6:11	r815		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word mouth refers to the action of speaking with the mouth, and the word heart refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the heart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
719	6:11	jvak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had opened their mouths toward the Corinthians. He means that he and his fellow workers have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in 6:3–10. Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
720	6:11	w42w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers have opened wide their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
721	6:12	m2kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (not restricted), they are loving and caring for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
722	6:12	u4fz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
723	6:12	p88s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of affections, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
724	6:13	ypsz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	Here, the clause I speak as to children is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
725	6:13	b62y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν	1	Here, the phrase same exchange refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the exchange, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this exchange by opening themselves to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
726	6:13	zdfh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς τέκνοις λέγω	1	Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing children. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of exchange. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
727	6:13	c6vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of 6:11. Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
728	6:14	qd33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις	1	Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were yoked together with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not try to accomplish what God wants them to do by working with unbelievers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
729	6:14	x89j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
730	6:14	v7kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for introduces some reasons why the Corinthians should not be yoked with unbelievers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
731	6:14	v7pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1	Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
732	6:14	n5so		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of partnership, righteousness, and lawlessness, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can righteous people and lawless people partner” or “can what is righteous partner with what is lawless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
733	6:14	xr52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fellowship, light, and darkness, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
734	6:14	h9ks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1	Here Paul speaks about how light and darkness do not have fellowship. He could be speaking about: (1) things and people that are good (light) and things and people that are evil (darkness). Alternate translation: “what fellowship do good people have with evil people” (2) God’s kingdom and people (light) and Satan’s kingdom and people (darkness). Alternate translation: “what fellowship does God’s kingdom have with Satan’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
735	6:15	r1vq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ, ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου	1	Here, just as in 6:14, Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “And Christ has no harmony with Beliar! Nor does a believer have a share with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
736	6:15	f832		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of harmony, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
737	6:15	rm3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βελιάρ	1	Here, the word Beliar is another name for the devil, who is also called Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote or short phrase that clarifies that Beliar is another name for Satan. Alternate translation: “Beliar, that is, Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
738	6:15	z9iv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου	1	Here Paul is speaking of believers and unbelievers in general, not of one particular believer and one particular unbeliever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to believers and unbelievers in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
739	6:16	y99x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων?	1	Here, just as in 6:14–15, Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “And the temple of God has no agreement with idols!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
740	6:16	m658		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τίς & συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of agreement, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
741	6:16	jc79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of what Paul said about the temple of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
742	6:16	s3l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here, the word we refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
743	6:16	aqql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος	1	Here Paul speaks as if we were a temple. He follows this metaphor with a quotation which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the temple is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
744	6:16	oc16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεοῦ & ζῶντος	2	Here, the phrase the living God identifies God as the one who lives and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that God is actually alive, unlike idols and other things that people call their gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. See how you translated the similar phrase in 3:3. Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
745	6:16	es7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	Here, the phrase just as God said introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how we are the temple of the living God. The words Paul quotes could come from Leviticus 26:12; Jeremiah 31:33; and Ezekiel 37:27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
746	6:16	u5g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
747	6:16	g0nl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνπεριπατήσω	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would walk among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he were walking around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
748	6:16	vy1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί	1	Here, the word translated themselves switches focus from God to they. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to they in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
749	6:17	fe1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	διὸ ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ	1	Here Paul uses the words Therefore and says the Lord to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from Isaiah 52:11, but the phrase and I will welcome you is from a Greek translation of Ezekiel 20:34. The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way which shows that it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move says the Lord to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that, the Lord says {through the prophets}, ‘Come out from the midst of them, and be separate, and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
750	6:17	peek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε	1	Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
751	6:17	z5ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word them refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
752	6:17	vfie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε	1	Here the author of the quotation uses the word touch to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by touching it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “come into contact with no unclean things” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
753	6:17	jg48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	κἀγὼ	1	Here, the word and introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
754	6:18	ft65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ	1	Here Paul uses the word And to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from 2 Samuel 7:8 and 2 Samuel 7:14. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
755	6:18	dks6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
756	7:intro	hg36				0	2 Corinthians 7 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4) Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4) Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16) Special Concepts in this Chapter Boasting In 7:4, 14, Paul refers to how he boasts about the Corinthians. What he means is that he tells people about how wonderful and great he thinks they are. It is important to indicate that Paul is not describing the Corinthians as better than they actually are. Rather, Paul indicates in 7:14 that what he says about them is actually true. Use a word or phrase that refers to saying good things that are true about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]]) Encouragement and comfort The words for “encouragement” and “comfort” are very closely related. Sometimes it is not clear whether Paul is focusing more on encouragement (which implies urging someone to act) or more on comfort (which implies making someone feel better). If you have a word or phrase that can indicate both comfort and encouragement, you could use it in this chapter. Otherwise, consider which emphasis the context implies. Generally, the ULT models one option, and the UST models the other option. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/comfort]]) The previous letter In 7:8–12, Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. He has already referred to this letter in chapter 2. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter to help them do what was right. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. Grief and sorrow The words for being “grieved” and for “sorrow” are very closely related. Paul uses these words to refer to being hurt or feeling upset about something. Paul distinguishes between two kinds of sorrow: one that is with respect to God, godly sorrow; the other is with respect to the world, worldly sorrow. If possible, use a word or words that are general enough to refer to both kinds of sorrow. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians except in 7:1. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) Switches between first person singular and first person plural Throughout this chapter, Paul switches between singular forms (“I”) and plural forms (“we”) of the first person. These switches are probably not just stylistic. Rather, they indicate when Paul is referring just to himself and when he is referring to himself and those who serve with him. If possible, preserve these switches in your translation. What happened in Corinth In this chapter, Paul continues to refer to something that happened in Corinth, something he already discussed in chapter 2. However, Paul gives even less details here than he did in chapter 2 about what happened. What we know is that a person, probably a man from the Corinthians’ group, did something wrong and hurt some of the Corinthians and possibly also hurt Paul. In response, Paul wrote a severe letter that “grieved” the Corinthians. Paul also sent Titus to Corinth to make sure that everything was resolved. In this chapter, Paul especially focuses on how happy he was to hear what Titus told him about how the Corinthians responded. Avoid providing more details in this chapter than Paul does, but make sure that your translation generally refers to events like these.
757	7:1	h5xv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he said in 6:16–18 about being God’s temple and family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “On account of those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
758	7:1	k46r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1	Here, the word having introduces a reason why believers should cleanse themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
759	7:1	tytd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταύτας & ἔχοντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promises, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “having been promised these things” or “God having pledged these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
760	7:1	pw5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύτας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	Here Paul is referring to the promises from the Old Testament that he quoted in 6:16–18, which indicate that believers are God’s people, that God will welcome them, and that they are God’s sons and daughters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly refers back to those promises. Alternate translation: “the promises that I have quoted” or “those promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
761	7:1	gwjt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς	1	By us and ourselves, Paul means himself, his fellow workers, and the Corinthians, so use the inclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
762	7:1	fv49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παντὸς μολυσμοῦ σαρκὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of defilement, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “defile” or “corrupt.” Alternate translation: “anything that corrupts flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
763	7:1	f00w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος	1	Here Paul uses the word flesh to refer to the outward part of people, particularly the body. He uses the word spirit to refer to the inward part of people, the part that thinks, feels, and makes decisions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to similar parts of a person. Alternate translation: “of body and soul” or “of the physical and the spiritual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
764	7:1	turq			ἐπιτελοῦντες	1	Here, the word perfecting could introduce: (1) another thing that believers should do while they are cleansing themselves. Alternate translation: “and let us perfect” or “as we perfect” (2) the result of the “cleansing.” Alternate translation: “so that we perfect” (3) how they “cleanse” themselves. Alternate translation: “by perfecting”
765	7:1	c2xf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “perfecting how holy we are” or “growing to be perfectly holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
766	7:1	pt41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	φόβῳ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify fear that is directed toward God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. See how you translated the similar phrase “fear of the Lord” in 5:11. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to God” or “the fear that we experience for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
767	7:1	xlet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the idea by using a verbal form of “fear.” Alternate translation: “in how we fear God” or “through fearing God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
768	7:2	x55b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς; οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν	1	Here and in the rest of this chapter, by us and we Paul means himself and his fellow workers but not the Corinthians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
769	7:2	c2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς	1	Here, just as in 6:11–13, Paul speaks of loving others as if it were about having space for others in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Show love for us” or “Make room in your hearts for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
770	7:2	v4nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν	1	Here Paul uses three phrases with similar structure and meaning to strongly deny that he did anything to hurt any of the Corinthians. It is possible that the word wronged refers to doing something unjust, the word ruined refers to corrupting or perverting someone, and the phrase took advantage of refers to gaining money or things from somebody without doing anything in return. If the repetition would not communicate a strong denial in your language, or if you do not have three words for these ideas, you could express the idea with only one or two strong clauses. Alternate translation: “We wronged and took advantage of no one” or “We did not hurt any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
771	7:3	pgze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ λέγω	1	Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers did not hurt anyone (7:2). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
772	7:3	bhb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς κατάκρισιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of condemnation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to condemn you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
773	7:3	ckpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προείρηκα	1	Here Paul refers back to what he said in 6:11: “our heart has been opened wide.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I told you earlier in this letter” or “I wrote above in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
774	7:3	fay3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε	1	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the hearts of him and his fellow workers. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
775	7:3	xzg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν	1	Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and his fellow workers from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
776	7:4	uamr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλή μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς, πολλή μοι καύχησις ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of confidence and boasting, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I am very confident about you; I boast greatly on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
777	7:4	yp45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul could be saying that he: (1) is confident that they follow Christ and do what is right. Alternate translation: “is my confidence that you follow Christ” or “is my confidence that you are doing well” (2) can speak boldly or confidently to them. Alternate translation: “is my boldness in speaking to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
778	7:4	mh12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “You have filled me with encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
779	7:4	k5t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ παρακλήσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of encouragement, you could express the idea by using a verbal form such as “encourage” or “comfort.” Alternate translation: “how you urge me onward” or “how you comfort me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
780	7:4	mx9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ	1	Here Paul speaks as if he were “overflowing” with joy. He means that he has so much joy that he feels like it has completely filled him up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am exceedingly joyful” or “I have so much joy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
781	7:4	mr75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I overflow as I rejoice” or “I overflow with how joyful I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
782	7:5	rt1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	Here, the phrase For even introduces further explanation of the “afflictions” that Paul mentioned in 7:4. However, Paul is also speaking again about what he said in 2:13 about traveling to Macedonia. Consider a natural way to reintroduce Paul’s travel plans, and if possible, use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of the afflictions. Alternate translation: “Speaking of afflictions, I will tell you more about my journeys:” or “Now as for the travels I have spoken about,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
783	7:5	f3c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς	1	In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
784	7:5	c8ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase our flesh refers to the whole person. Paul uses it to emphasize the physical or bodily nature of their suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the whole person and not just their flesh. Alternate translation: “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
785	7:5	zwwy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν	1	Here Paul continues what he was saying in 2:13 about how he “had no relief” in his “spirit.” What he means is that traveling to Macedonia did not help with his concerns about Titus or his sufferings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had no relief from our sufferings and worries at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
786	7:5	byp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of relief, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “relieve” or “rest.” Alternate translation: “was not relieved at all” or “could not rest at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
787	7:5	h3cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	θλιβόμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “we were experiencing afflictions” or “people were afflicting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
788	7:5	i4wr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι	1	Here, the word without identifies the source of the conflicts as external to Paul and those with him. The word within identifies the source of the fears as internal to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that similarly identify internal and external sources. Alternate translation: “conflicts from others, fears from ourselves” or “conflicts on the outside, fears on the inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
789	7:5	zkqr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of conflicts and fears, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “quarrel” and “fear.” Alternate translation: “people fought us without, and we feared within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
790	7:6	qdto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast with the “conflicts” and “fears” that Paul described in the previous verse (7:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
791	7:6	p3fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὁ παρακαλῶν τοὺς ταπεινοὺς	1	Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one who comforts the humble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
792	7:6	oe9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ταπεινοὺς	1	Paul is using the adjective humble as a noun in order to refer to all people who are humble. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the humble people” or “those who are humble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
793	7:6	uujt			ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ Τίτου	1	Alternate translation: “by sending Titus to us”
794	7:7	z6jd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of comfort, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by how” or “by what you did so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
795	7:7	w7td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you comforted him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
796	7:7	nypy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀναγγέλλων	1	Here, the word reporting introduces how Paul knows about the comfort that the Corinthians gave to Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally introduces how Paul knows about what happened in Corinth. Alternate translation: “since he reported” or “which we heard about when he reported” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
797	7:7	ljis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of longing, mourning, and zeal, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you longed for me, how you mourned, and how you were anxious to do what I asked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
798	7:7	hzt6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ	1	Here, the phrase for my sake modifies all three items in this list. The Corinthians experience longing to see Paul, they experience mourning because they grieved Paul, and they have zeal for Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “your longing for me, your mourning concerning me, and your zeal for my sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
799	7:7	xojr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	με & χαρῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “you caused me to rejoice” or “what you did caused me to rejoice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
800	7:7	fifc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μᾶλλον	1	Here, Paul speaks about how his joy upon receiving the report from Titus is even more than the joy that he already described in 7:4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “even more than I already had rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
801	7:8	zuvp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces Paul’s explanation of why he “rejoices even more” (see 7:7). This explanation continues in 7:9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I rejoice even more:” or “That is because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
802	7:8	ptq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	1	Here Paul is speaking as if grieving them were only a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “although” or “though.” Alternate translation: “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
803	7:8	lzww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἐπιστολῇ & ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη	1	Here Paul again refers to a letter that he previously sent to them. See how you referred to this letter in 2:3–9. Alternate translation: “my previous letter … the letter” or “the letter that I sent you before … that letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
804	7:8	wlbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην (βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ὥραν ἐλύπησεν ὑμᾶς)	1	Here, the phrase Even if I was regretting {it} could go with: (1) “now I rejoice” in 7:9. In other words, although Paul may have regretted sending the letter, now he rejoices. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it—I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour—” (2) I see. In other words, Paul may have regretted sending the letter because he saw that it grieved the Corinthians. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to begin a new sentence with the following verse. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it, it was because I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
805	7:8	b552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην	1	Here, the phrase Even if could introduce: (1) something that Paul did in the past but does not do now. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he “regretted” sending the letter after he sent it, but he does not regret it now. Alternate translation: “Even though I was regretting it then” (2) something that Paul did not actually do. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he might have “regretted” sending the letter, but there is no possibility of that now. Alternate translation: “Even though I might have regretted it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
806	7:8	vk7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βλέπω	1	Here, the word seeing refers generally to “knowing” something, not just to looking with one’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that clearly refers to knowing. Alternate translation: “I recognize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
807	7:8	ftuo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	βλέπω	1	Here, some manuscripts have “for I see,” and a few manuscripts have “seeing.” However, the best manuscripts have “I see.” Unless your readers are already familiar with one of these other wordings, it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
808	7:8	b2xj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	3	Here Paul is speaking as if being grieved for an hour were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “though.” Alternate translation: “though only” or “although just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
809	7:8	ob23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρὸς ὥραν	1	Here Paul uses the word hour to refer to a short period of time, but he does not specify how short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to a short period of time. Alternate translation: “for a brief time” or “for a short while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
810	7:9	z820		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε, ἀλλ’ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε εἰς μετάνοιαν	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “that you were grieved to the point of repentance, not that you were grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
811	7:9	kn5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλυπήθητε	-1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I grieved you … I grieved you … I grieved you” or “my letter grieved you … it grieved you … my letter grieved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
812	7:9	i8n0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μετάνοιαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “repent.” Alternate translation: “so that you repented” or “in such a way that you repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
813	7:9	lmw9			κατὰ Θεόν	1	Here, the phrase with respect to God indicates that how the Corinthians were grieved was how God desires people to be grieved. In other words, their “grief” was pleasing to God or “godly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves”
814	7:9	cg0o			Θεόν, ἵνα	1	Here, the word translated so that could introduce: (1) a result. Alternate translation: “God, with the result that” (2) a purpose. Alternate translation: “God in order that”
815	7:9	l6d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul explains that the Corinthians were not harmed or injured in any way by how they were grieved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you did not lose anything because of us” or “you were not harmed in any way by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
816	7:10	y0gi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (7:9) about “grief with respect to God” and how it does not lead to “suffering loss.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
817	7:10	dtm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη	1	Here Paul uses words very similar to those he used in 7:9: “you were grieved with respect to God.” Use a similar form to what you used there. Alternate translation: “the godly sorrow” or “the sorrow that God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
818	7:10	wmtx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἀμεταμέλητον ἐργάζεται	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sorrow, repentance, salvation, and regret, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being grieved with respect to God causes people to repent so that they are saved and do not regret being grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
819	7:10	lc4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀμεταμέλητον	1	Here, the phrase without regret could describe: (1) how those who have sorrow with respect to God do not experience regret. Alternate translation: “so there is no regret” (2) how Paul does not have regret for how he caused the Corinthians to feel sorrow. Alternate translation (preceded by a comma): “so that I do not have any regret” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
820	7:10	lc1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the kind of sorrow that the world experiences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But worldly sorrow” or “But the sorrow that is characteristic of this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
821	7:10	t234		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	Here, the word world refers to the people in the world who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this group of people. Alternate translation: “of unbelievers” or “of other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
822	7:10	uwz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον κατεργάζεται	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “leads these people to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
823	7:10	s94l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατον	1	Here, the word death refers not only to physical death but also to spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
824	7:11	hz1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a specific example of what Paul said in the previous verse about how “sorrow with respect to God works repentance towards salvation” (7:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a specific example, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
825	7:11	gpp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “look at” or “consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
826	7:11	uxa4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο & πόσην κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν σπουδήν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of earnestness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest this same thing caused you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
827	7:11	hpyz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸ τοῦτο τὸ κατὰ Θεὸν λυπηθῆναι & κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν	1	Here, the phrase to be made sorrowful with respect to God further defines what this same thing is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this relationship in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “this same thing, that is, to be made sorrowful with respect to God, produced in you” or “this same the experience of being made sorrowful with respect to God produced in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
828	7:11	qnsg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λυπηθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “to feel sorrowful” or “that I made you sorrowful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
829	7:11	t7uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1	Here, just as in 7:9–10, the phrase with respect to God indicates that how the Corinthians were sorrowful was how God desires people to be sorrowful. In other words, their “sorrow” was pleasing to God or “godly.” See how you expressed the idea in 7:9–10. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
830	7:11	h6jc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν, ἀλλὰ ἀγανάκτησιν, ἀλλὰ φόβον, ἀλλὰ ἐπιπόθησιν, ἀλλὰ ζῆλον, ἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for some or all of these ideas, you could express the ideas in another way. Each of the items in the list refers to one way that the Corinthians responded to the incident that caused Paul to write the previous letter that “grieved” them. Make sure that how you express the Corinthians’ responses fits with this situation. Alternate translation: “you were eager to defend yourselves, you were indignant, you were fearful, you were anxious to see us, you were zealous, and you were quick to punish the wrongdoer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
831	7:11	tcvv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ πράγματι	1	Here, the phrase this matter refers to what happened at Corinth that caused Paul to write the previous letter. Paul has already discussed this incident in 2:3–11, so he simply refers to it here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that similarly refers to something that has already happened and that has already been discussed. Alternate translation: “in this incident” or “in what was done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
832	7:12	d4uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1	Here, the word So introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in 7:8–11 about the letter and its results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
833	7:12	n0qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1	Here, the phrase I wrote refers to the previous letter that Paul sent to the Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in 2:3–4. Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
834	7:12	tqcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀδικηθέντος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person having done wrong did it. Alternate translation: “whom that person wronged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
835	7:12	i6sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” or “my letter might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
836	7:12	rqr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of earnestness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest you are on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
837	7:12	ycy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Paul refers to something being revealed before God to indicate a close connection to God. See how you translated the phrase before God in 4:2. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies to or approves the Corinthians’ earnestness. Alternate translation: “with God testifying to it” (2) the Corinthians recognize their earnestness when they are in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
838	7:13	afti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Here, the word this refers to what Paul has said in 7:6–12 about how the Corinthians treated Titus and how they responded to Paul’s letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you make the referent of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of those things” or “Because you responded in those ways,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
839	7:13	kn2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “Because of this, you have encouraged us” or “So then, what you did has encouraged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
840	7:13	f3xr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces Paul’s development of the ideas from the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
841	7:13	axyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ παρακλήσει ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of encouragement, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “how we have been encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
842	7:13	k6gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χαρᾷ Τίτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “how joyful Titus was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
843	7:13	n69e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if Titus’ spirit were a tired body that needed to be refreshed. He could mean that Titus: (1) was encouraged or given new energy. Alternate translation: “he was encouraged by all of you” or “he was energized by all of us” (2) was no longer worried about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he stopped worrying about all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
844	7:13	v2g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you had refreshed his spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
845	7:14	c72a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers rejoiced even more abundantly (7:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Also, we rejoiced since,” or “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
846	7:14	b4uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι, οὐ κατῃσχύνθην	1	Paul is speaking as if his boasting about the Corinthians were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He uses this form to introduce what he said about the Corinthians that might have caused him to be ashamed if it were not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that Paul did that might have led to being ashamed. Alternate translation: “I was not ashamed because of what I had boasted to him about you” or “what I boasted to him about you did not cause me to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
847	7:14	m22c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ κατῃσχύνθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I did not feel shame” or “you did not shame me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
848	7:14	wrxa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα & ἐλαλήσαμεν ὑμῖν	1	Here Paul could be referring to: (1) everything he has told the Corinthians, including the gospel. Alternate translation: “we spoke everything we have told you” (2) specifically what he told the Corinthians about his travel plans. Alternate translation: “we spoke to you about our travel plans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
849	7:14	t1za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully” or “in a truthful way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
850	7:14	q5hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of boasting and truth, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what we boasted about became true with reference to Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
851	7:15	p2ja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of affections, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he loves you more abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
852	7:15	qm18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσοτέρως	1	Here, the phrase more abundant could indicate that: (1) Titus has more affections for them than he did before he visited them. Alternate translation: “more abundant than before” (2) Titus simply has a great deal of affections. Alternate translation: “very abundant” or “great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
853	7:15	ezep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀναμιμνῃσκομένου	1	Here, the word remembering introduces a reason why Titus’ affections are more abundant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since he remembers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
854	7:15	gp09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν	1	Here, the Corinthians’ obedience could be directed toward: (1) Paul and his fellow workers, including Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to us” (2) just Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
855	7:15	uagc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	Here the Corinthians’ fear could be directed toward: (1) Titus as Paul’s representative. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling with respect to him” (2) the consequences of what had happened. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling because of what had happened” (3) God, whom Titus represented. Alternate translation: “with and trembling with respect to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
856	7:15	dtni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fear and trembling, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as you feared and trembled” or “fearfully and nervously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
857	7:15	g9bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	The terms fear and trembling mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “great fear” or “deep respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
858	7:16	hr3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θαρρῶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	The implication is that Paul is confident that the Corinthians are doing what is right or proper. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am confident that you do what is proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
859	8:intro	kl7m				0	2 Corinthians 8 General Notes Structure and Formatting Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15) Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6) Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5) Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation from Exodus 16:18 in 8:15. Special Concepts in this Chapter The collection for the church in Jerusalem Throughout this chapter, Paul encourages the Corinthians to finish collecting the money they were going to contribute to what Paul was gathering to send to the believers in Jerusalem. Paul sometimes calls participating in this collection a grace. He often refers to this collection indirectly, which was a polite way to talk about financial matters in his culture. If people in your culture speak more directly about financial matters, you may need to make some of the ideas more explicit. In order to encourage the Corinthians to give to this collection, Paul tells them that the Macedonian believers have already given generously (8:1–5), states reasons why the Corinthians should give (8:6–15), and assures the Corinthians that the people who are managing the collection are trustworthy (8:16–24). Make sure that your translation includes these elements that encourage the Corinthians to give to the collection. The generosity of the Macedonians In 8:1–5, Paul tells the Corinthians about how the Macedonian believers contributed generously to the collection even though they were poor and suffering. He does this to encourage the Corinthians also to give generously. While Paul does not directly compare how much the Corinthians and Macedonians have given, he does use the Macedonians as an example. Your translation should clearly present the Macedonians as an example to imitate. Equality In 8:13–14, Paul indicates that one of the reasons for the collection is “equality” among believers. He does not mean that every believer must have exactly the same amount of possessions and money. What he does mean is that believers who have much should share with believers who have little. He wants all believers to be doing “equally” well. So, while this does not mean that everyone has exactly the same amount of possessions and money, it does mean that some believers should not be rich when others are poor. Consider how you might express the idea of general, although not exact, “equality.” Titus and two traveling companions In 8:16–23, Paul commends Titus and then introduces and commends the two men who travel with him. Most likely, these three men traveled together and carried Paul’s letter (2 Corinthians) with them. Paul does not name the two men, but he does indicate that they are trustworthy and should be respected. If you have normal ways of introducing and commending people, you could use them here. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
860	8:1	mm8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
861	8:1	d3pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
862	8:1	a73v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
863	8:1	nqwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a form that makes it clear. Alternate translation: “the grace from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
864	8:1	phws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of God” or “what comes graciously from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
865	8:1	d1mj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν δεδομένην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
866	8:1	xnfz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς Μακεδονίας	1	As Paul indicates in 7:5, he is in Macedonia when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this place was Paul’s location when he wrote the letter. Alternate translation: “of Macedonia, where I am currently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
867	8:2	zjd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word that could introduce: (1) an explanation or definition of the “grace of God” in 8:1. Alternate translation: “that is, that” (2) a reason or support for what Paul said in 8:1. Alternate translation: “which we know to be true because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
868	8:2	usu2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πολλῇ δοκιμῇ θλίψεως	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a severe trial that is made up of or characterized by affliction. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a severe trial that afflicted them” or “affliction, which was a severe trial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
869	8:2	b7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of abundance, joy, and poverty, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how very joyful they were and how deeply impoverished they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
870	8:2	a6td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul is speaking of poverty as if it were a deep hole. He means that they were very poor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their extreme poverty” or “their great poverty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
871	8:2	pr8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul is speaking of generosity as if it were riches. He means that these people had very much generosity, just like a rich person has very much money. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of their generosity” or “how much generosity they had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
872	8:2	z6mt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe riches that could: (1) indicate how much generosity these people had. Alternate translation: “their rich generosity” (2) be made up of generosity. Alternate translation: “the riches that are their generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
873	8:2	hcgh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generosity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how richly generous they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
874	8:3	muo6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces a support for what Paul said in the previous verse (8:2) about the “riches of their generosity.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
875	8:3	tf8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ δύναμιν & παρὰ δύναμιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ability, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they gave according to what they were able to give … beyond what they were able to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
876	8:3	wxoh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐθαίρετοι	1	Here, the phrase of their own accord indicates that no one forced or required the believers in Macedonia to act as they did. Rather, they chose to do so on their own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “of their own free will” or “because they wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
877	8:3	soq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	αὐθαίρετοι	1	Here, the phrase of their own accord could modify: (1) the word gave which is implied in this verse. Alternate translation: “which they did of their own accord” (2) “pleaded” in the following verse (8:4). If you use the following alternate translate, you will need to remove the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “and that of their own accord and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
878	8:4	tfsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δεόμενοι ἡμῶν, τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν τῆς διακονίας τῆς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of favor and fellowship, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they pleaded with us to favor them and allow them to take part in this ministry that is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
879	8:4	jdqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν	1	The two words favor and fellowship work together to express a single idea. The word fellowship describes what the favor is. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “the favor of the fellowship” or “the gift of fellowship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
880	8:4	nmw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	Here Paul does not give very many details about the ministry because he had already told the Corinthians about it in 1 Corinthians 16:1–4. From that passage and other passages, we know that Paul was collecting money from various churches to send to Jerusalem to help the believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “of this ministry that is for the saints in Jerusalem” or “of this ministry of sending money to the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
881	8:5	y9sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ καθὼς ἠλπίσαμεν, ἀλλ’	1	Here Paul is implying that the Macedonians did more than Paul and his fellow workers had hoped, not that they did less. If this clause would imply that the Macedonians did less, you could use a form that implies that they did more. Alternate translation: “while we had hoped for something, they did more:” or “doing more than we had hoped,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
882	8:5	t73o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον	1	Here Paul speaks as if the Macedonians were gifts that they themselves gave to the Lord and to us. He means that the Macedonians chose to completely serve and honor the Lord and us. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they first devoted themselves” or “they chose first to be servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
883	8:5	w0el			πρῶτον & καὶ	1	Here, the words first and then could indicate what is: (1) more and less important. Alternate translation: “primarily … and secondarily” (2) first and second in sequence. Alternate translation: “first … and second”
884	8:5	k4pa			καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Here, the phrase and then could introduce: (1) what comes after what they first did. Alternate translation: “and after that to us” (2) the second part of what they first did. Paul implies that what comes after what they first did is giving money. Alternate translation: “and to us before they gave money”
885	8:5	m2mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and then they gave themselves to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
886	8:5	kq0n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ἡμῖν, διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	Here, the phrase by the will of God could modify: (1) how the Corinthians both gave themselves to the Lord and to us. Alternate translation: “by the will of God they first gave themselves to the Lord and then to us” (2) just how the Corinthians gave themselves to us. Alternate translation: “they first gave themselves to the Lord and then, by the will of God, to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
887	8:5	kphi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as God wanted” or “which is what God desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
888	8:6	z42y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς προενήρξατο	1	Here Paul could be implying that Titus already began: (1) the grace, which is collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “just as he began this grace” (2) to work for the sake of the Corinthians in general. Alternate translation: “just as he began to serve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
889	8:6	vn4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην	1	Here, the word grace refers to what it did in 8:4: being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in 8:4. Alternate translation: “this gift as well” or “this gracious act of giving as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
890	8:6	i4jd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you also are graciously contributing” or “what you also are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
891	8:7	x7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word But introduces a new section. It is does not primarily contrast with what Paul has already said, although it does introduce a change in focus from the Macedonians and Titus to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or a change in focus. Alternate translation: “Now” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
892	8:7	mv4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ	1	Paul says everything here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in so many things” or “in very many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
893	8:7	iu8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith, speech, knowledge, earnestness, and love, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgeable about many things, very earnest, and full of how we have loved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
894	8:7	hy1o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read from us in you. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “from you in us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
895	8:7	zhg5			ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, the phrase from us in you could indicate that: (1) the love is how Paul and his fellow workers feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have love. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you”
896	8:7	gqz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι	1	Here, the word grace refers to what it did in 8:4, 6: being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “in this gift” or “in this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
897	8:7	fpe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you are graciously contributing” or “in what you are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
898	8:8	mc1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	The pronoun this refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Corinthians “should abound in this act of grace” (8:7). If this is not clear for your readers, you could more clearly refer to that exhortation. Alternate translation: “I say what I just did” or “I say that you should abound in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
899	8:8	xgi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς & τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of genuineness, love, and earnestness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that how you love others is genuine through how earnest others are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
900	8:8	wn2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς	1	Here, the phrase through the earnestness of others indicates the standard by which Paul is proving the love of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the standard by which something else is proved or tested. Alternate translation: “in comparison with the earnestness of others” or “against the earnestness of others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
901	8:8	x7fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἑτέρων	1	Paul is using the adjective others as a noun to mean other people, particularly other believers. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
902	8:9	irzk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why the Corinthians should give money to help fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “That is because,” or “Now you should abound in giving because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
903	8:9	c1ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “what our Lord Jesus Christ has graciously done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
904	8:9	iz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε	1	Here, Paul is speaking of what God considers valuable, including blessings, power, and honor, as if it were wealth. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “he became like a poor person for your sake, though he was like a rich person, so that by what was like that one’s poverty, you might become like rich people” or “he gave up blessings and honor for your sake, though he had possessed great blessings and honor, so that by giving those things up, you might receive blessings and honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
905	8:9	j5ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of poverty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by that one being poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
906	8:10	b7ht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτῳ	1	Here, the word this could refer to: (1) the issue that Paul is speaking about, which is the Corinthians collecting money for believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “about this grace of giving” or “about collecting money” (2) what Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “in what follows” or “in what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
907	8:10	azlo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	Here, the word this could refer to: (1) the Corinthians hearing Paul’s opinion. Alternate translation: “listening to my opinion” (2) how Paul is giving an opinion instead of a command. Alternate translation: “an opinion instead of a command” (3) giving money. Alternate translation: “the act of giving” or “collecting money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
908	8:10	z8kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὑμῖν & οἵτινες	1	Here, the word who could introduce: (1) further information about what the Corinthians were doing. In this case, it describes the Corinthians instead of distinguishing them from other people. Alternate translation: “for you, who” (2) what kind of people the Corinthians are. In this case, it distinguishes the Corinthians from other people and describes them as the kind of people for whom this is profitable. Alternate translation: “for you, you who” or “for you, since you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
909	8:10	spzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ μόνον τὸ ποιῆσαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ θέλειν, προενήρξασθε ἀπὸ πέρυσι	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Paul is emphasizing desire, so consider a natural way to emphasize this part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “certainly desired to begin to do this and did not just begin to do it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
910	8:10	mt5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ποιῆσαι & τὸ θέλειν	1	In these phrases, Paul is speaking about collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to collect money for the Jerusalem believers … to do desire to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
911	8:11	himo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ δὲ	1	Here, the phrase But now introduces an exhortation for what to do in the present time as opposed to what they already did “a year ago” (see 8:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that transitions from the past to the present. Alternate translation: “So at this present time,” or “At this time,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
912	8:11	fc27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of readiness and desire, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “just you were ready and willing to do it” or “just as you were eager and wanted to do it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
913	8:11	d6ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of completion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “also you may complete it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
914	8:11	rgl0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν	1	Here, the phrase from what you have indicates that Paul wants the Corinthians to give some of the things or money that they own. He does not want them to borrow money or give everything that they own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “from what you are able” or “with you giving what you can afford” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
915	8:12	c50n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (8:11) about giving “from what you have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that you should give from what you have, because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
916	8:12	tgch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	Paul uses the word if to indicate that this is a hypothetical condition. In other words, what people give will only be acceptable if the readiness is already there. Use a natural form in your language for introducing one thing that is a requirement for another thing. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
917	8:12	mx7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ προθυμία πρόκειται	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of readiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “someone is ready” or “a person is already eager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
918	8:12	c2zc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὸ & εὐπρόσδεκτος	1	Here Paul does not state what is fully acceptable. He implies that it is whatever they give that is fully acceptable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is fully acceptable to give” or “whatever one gives is fully acceptable according to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
919	8:12	k9wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔχει	1	Although the word he is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “what one does not have” or “what he or she does not have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
920	8:13	mp6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (8:13) about giving “according to whatever one might have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see, I want you to give not” or “I say that because my goal is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
921	8:13	iyop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Paul implies that he is speaking about the goal or purpose of giving to other believers. The ULT supplies very general words here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use more specific words. Alternate translation: “I do not want you to give” or “we give to fellow believers not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
922	8:13	smk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ & ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις, ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “this is out of equality, not so that there is relief for others but tribulation for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
923	8:13	zht9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of relief and tribulation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “others are relieved but you are troubled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
924	8:13	y6xj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὑμῖν & ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	Here, the phrase but out of equality could: (1) contrast with what Paul has said in this verse about some having relief and others having tribulation. Alternate translation: “for you, but so that there is equality” (2) introduce what Paul says in the following verse about believers sharing “abundance.” If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the capital letter at the beginning of the following verse. Alternate translation: “for you. Rather, out of equality,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
925	8:13	no45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	Here, the phrase out of equality could provide: (1) the basis or principle for giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “because the goal is equality” or “from the principle of equality” (2) the desired result from giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “so that everyone is equal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926	8:13	ktd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of equality, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “focusing on everyone being equal” or “we are trying to make everyone equal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
927	8:14	um8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ, τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα, ἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα	1	Here, the phrase At the present time could refer to: (1) how things were when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they have more than the Jerusalem believers do, and so they should help. In the future, if the Jerusalem believers have more than the Corinthians, they will help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “At this time, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the abundance of money of those ones may be for your need in the future” (2) the time between Christ’s first and second comings. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should help the Jerusalem believers financially, and the Jerusalem believers will help them spiritually. Alternate translation: “In this new age, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the spiritual abundance of those ones may be for your need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
928	8:14	uqyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of abundance and lack, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what you abundantly possess is for what those ones lack” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
929	8:14	jkwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of abundance and need, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what those ones abundantly possess may be for what you need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
930	8:14	om8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	γένηται ἰσότης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of equality, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everyone is equal” or “everyone does equally well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
931	8:15	xpr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from Exodus 16:18. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way, or you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” or “just as you can read in Exodus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
932	8:15	ue8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the person who wrote the book of Exodus. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in Exodus” or “it says in Exodus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
933	8:15	u28y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ τὸ πολὺ, οὐκ ἐπλεόνασεν; καὶ ὁ τὸ ὀλίγον, οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν	1	Here Paul is quoting from a story about how God led the Israelites through the desert. They did not have much food, so God miraculously made something like bread appear on the ground for them. The Israelites called the food “manna,” and God commanded each of them to gather a specific amount for each person. This amount was just right, which is what this quotation describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Any Israelite who gathered much manna did not have too much, and any Israelite who gathered little manna did not have too little” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
934	8:15	ahrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ τὸ	-1	The phrase the one represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “Those … those” or “Everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
935	8:16	w40p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a new section. Paul is again speaking about Titus, whom he last mentioned in 8:6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
936	8:16	w8zo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, thanks {be} to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
937	8:16	dgpj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῷ διδόντι	1	Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who has placed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
938	8:16	duy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	Here, Paul is speaking as if earnestness were an object that God could put into the heart of Titus. He means that God made the heart of Titus earnest. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one making the same earnestness on your behalf characterize the heart of Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
939	8:16	yhr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν	1	Here, the word same indicates that the earnestness that Titus has is the same earnestness that Paul and his fellow workers have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same earnestness that we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
940	8:16	vsm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of earnestnest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making the heart of Titus earnest on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
941	8:16	cr18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “the mind of Titus” or “what Titus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
942	8:17	d9he		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of one way in which Titus showed the “earnestness” that Paul referred to in the previous verse (8:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or basis for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “For example,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
943	8:17	e4xn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν & παράκλησιν	1	Here Paul implies that the appeal was for Titus to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “our appeal that he visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
944	8:17	g404		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter to the Corinthians. In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “he has come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
945	8:17	jlyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	ἐξῆλθεν	1	Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter from Paul to the Corinthians. Use whatever tense is most natural for referring to this action. Alternate translation: “he is going” or “he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
946	8:17	dlo1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐθαίρετος	1	Here, the phrase of his own accord indicates that no one forced or required Titus to act as he did. Rather, he chose to do so on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. See you how translated the similar phrase in 8:3. Alternate translation: “of his own free will” or “because he wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
947	8:18	txld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Also,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
948	8:18	crw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	συνεπέμψαμεν	1	Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in the previous verse for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending together” or “we sent together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
949	8:18	rje2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν	1	Paul is using the term brother to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
950	8:18	nd28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	Here, the phrase in the gospel describes generally in what area this brother is praised. Paul means that this brother acts to spread the gospel. This probably includes preaching the good news, but it probably also includes many other acts of service, like visiting believers and collecting money for other believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for his service to the gospel” or “for spreading the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
951	8:19	j9rk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μόνον & ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the phrase not only this refers to how this “brother” received praise from all the churches. Paul uses this phrase to introduce something he thinks is even more important about this “brother.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something even more important. Alternate translation: “even more,” or “more importantly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
952	8:19	c667		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “also the churches chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
953	8:19	q5on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σὺν	1	Here, the phrase along with indicates what the person was chosen to help with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he could help with” or “with the intent that he could assist in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
954	8:19	pgtn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ	1	Here, the word grace refers to what it did in 8:6–7: being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “this gift” or “this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
955	8:19	mkwm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift” or “what people are graciously giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
956	8:19	k7dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
957	8:19	iph0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου δόξαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glorify the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
958	8:19	lvyu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προθυμίαν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul implies that they have readiness to help fellow believers, particularly the fellow believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our readiness to help others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
959	8:19	v22x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προθυμίαν ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of readiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
960	8:20	tfv0			στελλόμενοι	1	Here, the word avoiding introduces Paul’s reason for including this fellow believer in the process of collecting and distributing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase here that introduces a reason for doing something. Alternate translation: “we included him to avoid” or “our goal was to avoid”
961	8:20	o27q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τοῦτο, μή τις	1	Here Paul introduces what he and his fellow workers wish to avoid by using the word this, and then he states what it is that they do not want to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that identifies what Paul wishes to avoid. Alternate translation: “how someone” or “any possibility that a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
962	8:20	a3ps		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generosity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning what people generously offered that is being administered” or “concerning the generous gift being administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
963	8:20	mbm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ	1	Here, the word generosity refers to the large sum of money that Paul has collected and plans to give to the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this large sum of money” or “this generous sharing with the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
964	8:20	a7xv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
965	8:21	n4x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (8:20) about avoiding blame from others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
966	8:21	ey5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καλὰ, οὐ μόνον ἐνώπιον Κυρίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων	1	Here Paul speaks as if {what is} good were in front of or before both the Lord and men. He means that he cares about both what men and the Lord think is good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not only what is good in the Lord’s eyes, but also what is good in men’s eyes” or “not only what the Lord considers to be proper, but also what men consider to be proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
967	8:21	fitv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
968	8:22	mdcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a new idea, which is that Paul is sending one more person with Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new idea, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
969	8:22	j5jt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	συνεπέμψαμεν	1	Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent yet another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in 8:17 for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending” or “we have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
970	8:22	ax5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the term brother to refer to a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
971	8:22	d3yj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the word them refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “with these two men” or “with Titus and the other brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
972	8:22	qqcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃν ἐδοκιμάσαμεν	1	Here, the phrase whom we proved could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers have: (1) tested the brother, and he successfully passed the tests. Alternate translation: “whom we proved by testing” or “whom we tested and approved” (2) seen what the brother does, and they approve of him. Alternate translation: “whom we are sure about” or “of whom we approve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
973	8:22	bay7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλοῖς, πολλάκις σπουδαῖον ὄντα	1	Here, the phrase often being eager identifies what this brother was proved to be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “many ways to often be eager” or “in many ways that he was often eager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
974	8:22	l5yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολὺ σπουδαιότερον	1	Here Paul implies that the brother is even more eager than he was when Paul and his fellow workers proved him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is even more eager than he was before” or “he is more eager than ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
975	8:22	cusu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confidence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how very confident he is in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
976	8:22	iw9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul implies that the brother has confidence that the Corinthians will do what is right, particularly that they will give generously to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of his great confidence that you will give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
977	8:23	dbgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός	1	The terms partner and fellow worker mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is my partner in working for you” or “he is my fellow worker for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
978	8:23	mmi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” or “those believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
979	8:23	lat3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase our brothers refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our two brothers” or “the brother we mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
980	8:23	u8lx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe messengers who were sent by the churches. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are messengers sent by the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
981	8:23	sams		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the phrase a glory of Christ describes the brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clearer. Alternate translation: “and they are a glory of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
982	8:23	re88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive to describe glory that belongs to Christ. He could mean more specifically that: (1) the brothers give glory to Christ. Alternate translation: “and they glorify Christ” (2) what the brothers do shows the glory that Christ has. Alternate translation: “and they show how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
983	8:23	a8v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “glorifying Christ” or “who show that Christ is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
984	8:24	wpzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word Therefore introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has said in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of exhortation. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Since that is who they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
985	8:24	wk4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τὴν & ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul wants the Corinthians to prove the proof. If this form is redundant in your language, you could express the idea without using the word proof. Alternate translation: “that your love is real and that our boasting about you is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
986	8:24	lr1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if the proof was directly in front of the faces of the churches. What he means is that the proof is something that the churches can see and know about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the sight of the churches” or “with the knowledge of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
987	8:24	oc83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν & ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of proof and love, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you do love others and that what we boasted about you is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
988	9:intro	lt8d				0	2 Corinthians 9 General Notes Structure and Formatting Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15) Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5) Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9:9, which is quoted from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Plans for the collection In 9:1–5, Paul continues to speak about the collection for the Jerusalem believers, how the Corinthians should contribute to it, and why he is sending Titus and two other believers to the Corinthians. For more information, see the introduction to chapter 8. God enables and blesses those who give In 9:6–14, Paul describes how God gives people enough money and possessions so that they can give to others, and he also describes how God blesses people who do this. Finally, he explains how giving and receiving gifts glorifies God. Your translation should not suggest that God makes people who give to others very rich. Instead of that, Paul is saying that God gives some people more than they need so that they can give what they have to fellow believers, which leads to thanksgiving and glory to God. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Farming metaphors In 9:6, 10, Paul speaks of giving to fellow believers as if it were like farming. In 9:6, Paul refers to how farmers who sow much seed will harvest more produce. This applies to believers giving to each other: those who give more will produce more blessings for others and glory to God. In 9:10, Paul refers to how God is the one who provides the seeds and the produce for farmers. This again applies to believers giving to each other: God is the one who gives some believers more than they need so that they can share it with others, and God also makes those gifts bless others and glorify him. If possible, preserve these metaphors or express the ideas in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
989	9:1	wc5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation concerning why Paul and his fellow workers boast about the Corinthians (see 8:24). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
990	9:1	fxs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	Here Paul is referring specifically to the ministry of collecting money and giving it to the saints in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is referring to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry that is to the saints in Jerusalem” or “the money that we are collecting for the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
991	9:1	wcuz			περισσόν μοί ἐστιν τὸ γράφειν ὑμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “it is really not necessary for me to write to you”
992	9:2	o55j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces the reason why it is “excessive” for Paul to write to the Corinthians about the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “It is excessive since” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
993	9:2	yt00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of readiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready you are” or “that you are ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
994	9:2	e62g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν & παρεσκεύασται & ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας	1	Paul never directly states what the Corinthians and the Macedonians are ready or about to do. He implies that it is to give to the collection for the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “your readiness to help fellow believers … has been ready to help … stirred up most of them to help” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
995	9:2	jqee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ὅτι Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται ἀπὸ πέρυσι, καὶ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Achaia has been ready since last year,’ and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
996	9:2	rd2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀχαΐα	1	Achaia is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The city of Corinth was in this province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
997	9:2	i529		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται	1	Here, the word Achaia refers to the believers who live in this province. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the people directly instead of just to the place. Alternate translation: “the Christians in Achaia have been ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
998	9:2	zdgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ὑμῶν ζῆλος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of zeal, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how zealous you are” or “how you have acted zealously has” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
999	9:2	ynu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας	1	Here Paul speaks as if the zeal of the Corinthians could stir up or provoke the believers in Macedonia. He means that the Corinthians’ zeal encourages or motivates the Macedonians to act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “challenged most of them” or “motivated most of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1000	9:3	x7t9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in 9:1–2 about how eager the Corinthians are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “Despite that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1001	9:3	vdla		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	ἔπεμψα	1	Here Paul refers to how he sent the two believers and Titus when he sent this letter. Use the same tense that you used in 8:17 for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “I am sending” or “I have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1002	9:3	r5pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφούς	1	Here, the word brothers refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1003	9:3	lcx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφούς	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1004	9:3	k1er		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ μέρει τούτῳ	1	Here, the phrase this matter identifies the topic that Paul is speaking about: giving to the collection for the Jerusalem believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in this matter of giving to the Jerusalem believers” or “in this matter of contributing to the collection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1005	9:3	d69o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεσκευασμένοι ἦτε	1	Here Paul implies that he wants them to be ready to give to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you might be ready to contribute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1006	9:3	tdw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς ἔλεγον	1	Here, the phrase I was saying refers back to what Paul wrote in 9:2 about how he tells the Macedonian believers that the Corinthians have been prepared to give since the previous year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I was saying to the Macedonians” or “as I was saying that you were ready since last year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1007	9:4	iwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μή πως	1	Here, the word Otherwise introduces a possible situation in which the Corinthians would be unprepared, in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse about them being ready. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrasting situation. Alternate translation: “However” or “But if that did not happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1008	9:4	dov9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ἔλθωσιν σὺν ἐμοὶ Μακεδόνες, καὶ εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους	1	Here Paul introduces something that could happen when Paul visits them. There are two things that Paul thinks are possibilities. First, Macedonians might travel with him. Second, the Corinthians might be unprepared. Paul wishes to say that if both these things were to happen, both he and the Corinthians would be ashamed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that might happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that Macedonians come with me and find you unprepared; in that case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1009	9:4	j8ey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπαρασκευάστους	1	Here Paul implies that they would be unprepared to give money to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate: “unprepared to contribute” or “unprepared to give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1010	9:4	dy3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this situation would shame us—not to mention you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1011	9:4	wyzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν	1	Here, the phrase not to mention you indicates that Paul thinks that the Corinthians would obviously be ashamed, even more than Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “we, and most surely you, would be ashamed by” or “we—to say nothing of you—would be ashamed by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1012	9:4	vhme		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	Here, the phrase this situation could refer to: (1) what would actually happen if the Corinthians were unprepared, in contrast to what Paul had told the Macedonians would happen. Alternate translation: “what would actually be true” or “what had happened” (2) how sure Paul had been that the Corinthians would be ready. Alternate translation: “how confident we were” or “this confidence” (3) the project that Paul was undertaking, which was the collection of money for the Jerusalem believers. Alternate translation: “our project” or “what we were planning to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1013	9:4	rz1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	Here most ancient manuscripts read this situation. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “this situation of boasting.” Most likely, the phrase “of boasting” was added by accident because it appears in the similar phrase in 11:17. So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1014	9:5	v9y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word So introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in the previous verse (see 9:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1015	9:5	e5b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Here, the word brothers refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. See how you translated this word in 9:3. Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1016	9:5	cka7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1017	9:5	q1up		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of go. Alternate translation: “they should come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1018	9:5	p927		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “blessing that you promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1019	9:5	wjw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν, ταύτην	1	Here Paul uses the word blessing to refer to the money that the Corinthians said that they would contribute to Paul’s collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this blessing of money that you promised” or “this promised gift of yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1020	9:5	zg4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	οὕτως ὡς	1	Here Paul uses both the phrase in this way and the word as to introduce the two ways in which the Corinthians could give to the collection. Your language may only use one form to introduce this information. If so, you could use just one form here. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1021	9:5	nm2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1022	9:6	lmv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a new section. In this section, Paul gives the Corinthians more reasons why they should give generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1023	9:6	gho8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	Here, the word this refers to the words that Paul says in the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “here is what I say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1024	9:6	mm9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει	1	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians, by giving money to the collection, were sowing seeds and reaping the harvest from what those seeds produced. In the second clause, he uses the word blessings to show the Corinthians how to apply what he says about farmers to the collection. Just as farmers receive a harvest that fits with how they sowed, so people who give to help other believers will receive blessings that fit with what and how much they gave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or clearly express how the metaphor relates to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “giving money to help other believers is like farming. The one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” or “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing generously will also reap generously. Similarly, the one giving blessings to fellow believers will also receive blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1025	9:6	kqvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly; yes, the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1026	9:7	qrhq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	Although the words he and his are masculine, Paul is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “he or she has decided beforehand in his or her heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1027	9:7	tzt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “on his own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1028	9:7	whg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sorrow and compulsion, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “not because you are sad or forced to do so” or “not because you grieve or are required to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1029	9:7	t26d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word for introduces a reason why the Corinthians should not give from sorrow or from compulsion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1030	9:8	kuxl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶσαν χάριν	1	Here, the word grace refers primarily to good things that God has given to the Corinthians, including money and possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these things. Alternate translation: “every good thing” or “every blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1031	9:8	zxz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν χάριν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of gracious, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everything he gives” or “all his gracious gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1032	9:8	cz9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν παντὶ πάντοτε πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες	1	This phrase introduces a reason why the Corinthians can abound in every good work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “since in everything, always, you have all sufficiency” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1033	9:8	u8w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sufficiency, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely sufficient” or “being fully self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1034	9:8	jb7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν	1	Here, the phrase every good work generally describes any good deed. However, it may also more specifically refer to helping others by giving them what they need. Make sure you use a phrase that could indicate this specific meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “every good act of service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1035	9:9	fd6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from Psalm 112:9, to support the claim he made in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is written in a psalm” or “You can read just that in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1036	9:9	mma1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as someone wrote” or “Just as you can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1037	9:9	xvql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν & αὐτοῦ	1	The pronouns he and his could refer to: (1) a person who fears and obeys God. This is what the pronouns mean in Psalm 112:9. Alternate translation: “The person who obeys God distributed alms, he gave … his” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God distributed alms, he gave … his” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1038	9:9	a91h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν & αὐτοῦ	1	Although the terms he and his are masculine, the author of the quotation is using them in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “Such a person distributed alms, he or she … his or her” or “These people distributed alms, they gave … their” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1039	9:9	ypxe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν τοῖς πένησιν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could either connect the phrases in a way that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, or you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “He distributed alms, indeed, he gave to the poor” or “He distributed gifts to the poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1040	9:9	o0ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν	1	Here the author of the quotation uses the past tense to describe actions that normally or habitually occur. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is natural in your language for recurring or habitual actions. Alternate translation: “He is distributing alms, he is giving” or “He has distributed alms, he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1041	9:9	hvk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πένησιν	1	The author of the quotation is using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people in general. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1042	9:9	h2bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δικαιοσύνη αὐτοῦ μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of righteousness and eternity, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what he does righteously will last forever” or “he will always be righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1043	9:9	qcsn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	Here, the phrase endures to eternity could mean that: (1) the person always does what is righteous. Alternate translation: “will always be performed” or “will be acted out to eternity” (2) God will always remember and reward the righteous things that the person does. Alternate translation: “will always be remembered” or “will be remembered by God to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1044	9:10	ejwt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “So,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1045	9:10	p3fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ & ἐπιχορηγῶν σπόρον τῷ σπείροντι, καὶ ἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν	1	Here, the word one refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, who supplies seed to the sower and bread for food,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1046	9:10	gbkz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	σπόρον & τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν	1	In this verse, the word seed is singular in form, but it refers to many seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “much seed … much seed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1047	9:10	uts1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul applies what he said about actual seed and bread in the first half of the verse to what he is telling the Corinthians about giving to fellow believers. He means that God will give them the means to give (the seed) and will enable their gifts to really help others (increasing the fruit). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “will supply and multiply what you have like it was seed and will increase what your righteousness accomplishes like it was fruits” or “will supply and multiply your possessions and will increase what your righteousness accomplishes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1048	9:10	ci67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect fruits with your righteousness. He could be identifying fruits that: (1) come from righteousness. Alternate translation: “the fruits that come from your righteousness” (2) are righteousness. Alternate translation: “the fruits, that is, your righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1049	9:10	yv67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of the righteous things you do” or “of what you righteously do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1050	9:11	c2wo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλουτιζόμενοι	1	Here, the phrase being enriched does indicate that the Corinthians have more than enough money and possessions. Paul’s point is that God gives them more than they need so that they can share it with others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people having more than they need or being wealthy. Alternate translation: “being made wealthy” or “being given more than enough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1051	9:11	iexj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πλουτιζόμενοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God enriching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1052	9:11	fpko		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς πᾶσαν ἁπλότητα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generosity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be very generous” or “to act generously in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1053	9:11	b3e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἥτις	1	The pronoun which refers to generosity. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer more directly to generosity. Alternate translation: “which generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1054	9:11	b5n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατεργάζεται & εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of thanksgiving, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “causes thanks to be given to God” or “leads to people thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1055	9:11	u57h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase through us shows that Paul and his fellow workers are involved in how the generosity leads to thanksgiving. More specifically, they are the ones who collect and send the gifts to fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “through our work” or “by what we do with your gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1056	9:12	vuc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a ministry that is accomplished by performing this service. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “accomplishing this service” or “the ministry of performing this service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1057	9:12	l7kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης	1	Here, the phrase this service refers specifically to collecting and sending money to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of this service of helping the Jerusalem believers” or “of this service of collecting money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1058	9:12	esk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of thanksgivings, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is also causing God to be thanked many times” or “is also leading to many people often thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1059	9:13	plj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive to indicate that participating in the ministry proves what Paul says in the rest of this verse, that is, that they have obedience and generosity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “of what this ministry proves” or “of what you prove by performing this ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1060	9:13	k0kh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of proof and ministry, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what ministering in this way proves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1061	9:13	svot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	δοξάζοντες	1	Here the people who are glorifying God could be: (1) the believers in Jerusalem, who receive the money. Alternate translation: “the believers in Jerusalem are glorifying” (2) the Corinthians, who give the money. Alternate translation: “you are glorifying” (3) anyone who hears about the Corinthians giving money to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people are glorifying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1062	9:13	ze14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect obedience to your confession. He could be describing: (1) obedience to the content of the confession. Alternate translation: “of your obedience to your confession” or “you obey your confession” (2) obedience that goes along with the confession. Alternate translation: “obedience that goes with your confession” (3) obedience which consists in proclaiming the confession. Alternate translation: “of your obedience in speaking your confession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1063	9:13	sdnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and confession, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “you obey what you confess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1064	9:13	ajtu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the phrase to the gospel of Christ could go with: (1) obedience. In this case, they are obedient to the gospel of Christ. Alternate translation: “of your confession, that is, obedience to the gospel of Christ” (2) confession. In this case, they confess to the gospel of Christ. Alternate translation: “of your confession concerning the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1065	9:13	otyw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a gospel that is about Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “to the gospel that concerns Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1066	9:13	z8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a fellowship that is characterized by generosity. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an adjective such as “generous.” Alternate translation: “the generous fellowship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1067	9:13	ll01		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of generosity and fellowship, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unselfishly you give to them and to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1068	9:13	gyy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντας	1	Here, the word everyone refers primarily to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1069	9:14	qea1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ αὐτῶν δεήσει ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἐπιποθούντων ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase in their prayer on your behalf could go with: (1) longing. In this case, the word longing describes another thing that the Jerusalem believers do, besides “glorifying God” (see 9:13). Alternate translation: “and they are longing for you in their prayer on your behalf,” (2) the phrase “because of” in the previous verse (see 9:13). In this case, their prayer on your behalf is another reason why God receives glory. Alternate translation: “and because of their prayer on your behalf, in which they long for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1070	9:14	lwgq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιποθούντων	1	Here, the word longing could introduce: (1) the way in which they pray. Alternate translation: “in which they long” (2) why they pray. Alternate translation: “since they long” (3) something they do along with praying. Alternate translation: “and they long” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1071	9:14	alzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ὑπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐφ’ ὑμῖν	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a grace that is connected to God. He could mean that the grace: (1) is something that God gave to them to do. Alternate translation: “how God has given you the ability to perform surpassing grace” (2) is how God has acted towards them. Alternate translation: “how God has been surpassingly gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1072	9:14	vytr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐφ’ ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how very kind God has been to you” or “what God has graciously enabled you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1073	9:15	sxtg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, Thanks {be} to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:16. Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1074	9:15	es8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ	1	Here Paul does not clarify exactly what this gift is. He could mean the way in which the Corinthians give, which leads to a close connection between believers and glory to God. He could mean Jesus himself, whom God gave. In this case, use a general expression for a gift, since Paul does not clarify exactly what gift he means. Alternate translation: “for what he has given us, which is indescribable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1075	10:intro	abcd				0	2 Corinthians 10 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10) The true standard for boasting (10:1–18) Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in 10:17, which are from Jeremiah 9:24. Special Concepts in this Chapter Paul’s opponents In this and the following chapters, Paul defends himself and his authority against people who said that they were better than Paul and that the Corinthians should listen to them instead of to Paul. These people either lived in or were visiting Corinth. Paul does not state who these people are or refer to them directly. However, he does refer indirectly to what people are saying about him. Consider whether your readers would notice and understand Paul’s indirect references to his opponents. If not, you may need to make some of his references more explicit. See the notes for specific issues and translation options. Accusations against Paul In 10:1, 10, Paul states that some people think that he is meek and gentle in person but bold and forceful when he is away from them. In 10:7, Paul hints that his opponents might say that they are “of Christ” but that Paul and his fellow workers are not. It is very likely that Paul knew more things that people said about him, but he does not state anything more directly. Make sure that your translation shows that Paul knew that people were saying at least these two things about him. Boasting In 10:8, 13, 15–17, Paul speaks about boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. You should use a word or phrase that refers to saying that someone or something is great, and make sure that this word or phrase could refer to something good or to something bad. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]]) Measuring, measures, and limits In 10:12–16, Paul speaks about “measures” and “limits.” He is referring to standards with which people compare themselves and rules according to which people act. He argues that he and his fellow workers have compared themselves to a standard that God has provided and work according to rules that God gave. He suggests that his opponents compare themselves to standards they have invented and do not follow the rules that God has given. Further, Paul argues that the rules God gave to him and those with him require them to be the ones who teach the Corinthians. Consider what words and phrases would express these ideas clearly in your language. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Ironic speech In 10:1, Paul describes himself as “meek” when he is with the Corinthians but “bold” when he is away from them. He is speaking ironically, that is, describing himself as his opponents do when he does not really believe it. This is clear from 10:10, where Paul states that this opinion comes from others, not from himself. Further, it is possible that what Paul says in 10:10 is also ironic speech: “we do not dare to classify or compare ourselves with some of the ones commending themselves.” It is likely, however, that Paul actually means this and is not speaking from another person’s perspective. Consider a natural way to express the ironic speech in 10:1 so that your readers know that Paul is speaking from the perspective of his opponents. War metaphor In verses 10:3–6, Paul speaks of preaching the gospel and opposing God’s enemies as if he and his fellow workers were fighting a war. While he and those with him do not try to kill their enemies, he does mean that they fight and struggle very hard. If possible, preserve this metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Exclusive “we” Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) The word for “limit” and “area” The word translated “limit” in 10:13, 15 and “area” in 10:16 most generally refers to a straight stick that could be used for measuring things. In these verses, it could refer primarily to the standard by which things are measured or to the things that are measured. If the word refers to the standard by which things are measured, it refers primarily to what God has called Paul and his fellow workers to do. The UST generally follows this interpretation. If the word refers to the things that are measured, it refers primarily to the people or areas in which God has called Paul and his fellow workers to preach the gospel. The ULT generally follows this interpretation. Before you translate these verses, you should read 10:13–16 and consider which interpretation best fits with what Paul is arguing.
1076	10:1	yc1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	αὐτὸς δὲ ἐγὼ, Παῦλος	1	Here, the word Now introduces a new topic, which Paul introduces with several strong words. This new topic concerns Paul himself and his ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new topic and focuses on Paul himself. Alternate translation: “As for me, Paul, I” or “Concerning me, Paul, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1077	10:1	rf4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ὃς κατὰ πρόσωπον μὲν ταπεινὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀπὼν δὲ θαρρῶ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul describes himself with words that the Corinthians or his enemies use. He does not mean that he thinks these words are actually true about himself, but he repeats them to respond to what others are saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that these are words that other people have said about Paul. Alternate translation: “who appears to be meek when face to face among you, but being absent, appears to be bold toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1078	10:1	w8g1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον	1	Here, the phrase face to face refers to being with someone physically or in person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “when physically present” or “when bodily” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1079	10:1	aqbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας	1	The terms meekness and gentleness mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the gentleness” or “the humility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1080	10:1	gq7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of meekness and gentleness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by how meek and gentle Christ was” or “by how meekly and gently Christ acted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1081	10:1	jz4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to identify the meekness and gentleness that characterized Christ. He could mean that: (1) he is appealing to them with the same meekness and gentleness that Christ showed. Alternate translation: “in the meek and gentle manner that Christ had” (2) he wants them to consider the meekness and gentleness that Christ had when they listen to his appeal. Alternate translation: “asking that you think about the meekness and gentleness that Christ had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1082	10:2	s6iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Yes,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1083	10:2	f8dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	μὴ & θαρρῆσαι τῇ πεποιθήσει ᾗ	1	Here Paul includes both the action of being bold and the confidence with which he performs the action. He includes both of these elements because it makes the statement stronger. If your readers would find the repetition confusing, or if the repetition does not make the statement stronger, you could use just one of the terms and make the statement strong in another way. Alternate translation: “I will not need to be very bold, which is how” or “I will not need to have the great confidence with which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1084	10:2	k6mn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πεποιθήσει ᾗ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confidence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and confident in the way that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1085	10:2	e6lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τολμῆσαι	1	Here Paul implies that he will be courageous as he argues against or defends himself against the people who are saying bad things about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to be courageous when I argue” or “to courageously defend myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1086	10:2	ik1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τινας τοὺς λογιζομένους	1	Here Paul refers to people who are often called “the opponents.” It is not clear whether these people are some of the Corinthians or whether they have visited the Corinthians. What is clear is that they are saying bad things about Paul and claiming to have greater authority and a better gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our opponents who regard” or “any people who regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1087	10:2	i6hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦντας	1	Paul uses the term walking to speak of behavior in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1088	10:2	t6lv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses the phrase according to the flesh to refer to human ways of thinking and acting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1089	10:3	i2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (10:2) about how some people think that he and his fellow workers walk according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed, though” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1090	10:3	cvd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦντες	1	You should translate walking as you did in 10:2. Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1091	10:3	zbet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	Here, the phrase in the flesh indicates that Paul and his fellow workers are humans like everyone else. He is contrasting his humanity with how he wages war, which is not the way in which most humans wage war. If possible, express this idea so that it is clearly connected to how you translate according to the flesh. Alternate translation: “in human lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1092	10:3	k7h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	οὐ & στρατευόμεθα	1	Here and in 10:4–6, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were waging a war. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and other believers against people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people or fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1093	10:3	gpd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	You should translate this phrase as you did in 10:2. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1094	10:4	ge87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (10:3) about waging war not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1095	10:4	uf5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες	1	Here, just as in 10:3, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in warfare. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their weapons and about their enemies’ strongholds. He defines the strongholds as strategies or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means by this that God empowers him and his fellow workers to prove that these arguments are false. Paul does not mean that they are physically fighting against people or destroying physical strongholds. Preserve the metaphor if it is clear in your language or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1096	10:4	d1gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe weapons that are used to fight in warfare. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “our weapons for fighting” or “the weapons with which we wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1097	10:4	ohuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of warfare, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with which we fight” or “we use to wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1098	10:4	rk8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σαρκικὰ	1	Here, fleshly represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1099	10:4	cluj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, the phrase powerful to God indicates that the weapons are powerful because God makes them powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are made powerful by God” or “have God’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1100	10:4	ztdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες,	1	The phrases the tearing down of strongholds and tearing down strategies mean similar things. Paul is using the two phrases together for emphasis, with the the second phrase defining the first phrase. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for the tearing down of powerful strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1101	10:5	xuz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	καὶ πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, just as in 10:3–4, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. In this verse, he speaks about every high thing, which are fortifications or walls. He means that he and his fellow workers defeat or discredit anything that claims to be as great or important as the knowledge of God. Paul also speaks about taking thoughts captive. Just as the victor in a war takes the conquered people captive, so Paul and his fellow workers wish to take peoples’ thoughts captive so that these people are obedient to Christ. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and anything that is like a high fortress that raises itself against the knowledge of God, and we control every thought like we we were taking it captive into the obedience of Christ” or “and anything that proudly claims to be more important than the knowledge of God, and we take control of every thought into the obedience of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1102	10:5	b74d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe knowledge that is about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the knowledge about God” or “the knowledge that concerns God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1103	10:5	vm1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of knowledge, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “knowing God” or “what we know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1104	10:5	j6ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶν νόημα	1	Here, the phrase every thought could refer to: (1) the thoughts had by people who oppose the gospel. Alternate translation: “every thought of people who oppose the gospel” (2) the thoughts had by believers. Alternate translation: “every thought of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1105	10:5	z7ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe obedience that is directed to Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “obedience to Christ” or “obedience directed to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1106	10:5	r2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of obedience, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that Christ is obeyed” or “so that people are obedient to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1107	10:6	g9z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	καὶ ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχοντες, ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή	1	Here Paul finishes speaking as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. Here he says that they are in readiness, like soldiers ready to attack. When they attack, they will avenge every act of disobedience. What he means is that, once people are captive to the “obedience of Christ,” he and his fellow workers will punish them if they go back to being disobedient. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and being like soldiers who are ready to avenge every act of disobedience, when your obedience would be complete” or “and being prepared to punish everyone who disobeys, when your obedience would be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1108	10:6	j0bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἑτοίμῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of readiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “prepared” or “ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1109	10:6	m4ds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “every disobedient act, when you have completed being obedient” or “all the ways that people disobey, when you have completed obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1110	10:6	bgwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή	1	Here, the word obedience could refer to being obedient: (1) to Christ. This option is supported by the phrase “the obedience of Christ” in 10:5. Alternate translation: “your obedience to Christ” (2) to Paul. Alternate translation: “your obedience to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1111	10:6	ipsn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή	1	Here Paul is referring to how he wants the Corinthians to commit to obeying. When they always work towards obedience, then he and his fellow workers will avenge every act of disobedience. He does not mean that the Corinthians need to be perfectly obedient or complete specific acts of obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you fully work to obey” or “you completely strive for obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1112	10:7	y2yb			τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε	1	This sentence could be: (1) a command to look at what is obvious. Alternate translation: “You should look at the things according to appearance” (2) a rebuke concerning how they only look at how things appear. Alternate translation: “You are looking at the things according to appearance”
1113	10:7	gsvr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ πρόσωπον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of appearance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as they appear” or “according to how they appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1114	10:7	iuqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι, τοῦτο λογιζέσθω	1	Here Paul uses the conditional form to indicate what person he is addressing with his command to consider this again. If your language does not use this form to introduce a specific person or group of people, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “Let anyone who is convinced in himself that he is of Christ consider this” or “A person may be convinced in himself that he is of Christ. Let that person consider this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1115	10:7	zfp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is confident in himself that” or “knows for sure that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1116	10:7	s1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι, τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, ὅτι καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ	1	Although the terms himself, he, and him are masculine, Paul is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “some people are convinced in themselves that they are of Christ, let them consider this again concerning themselves: that just as they are of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1117	10:7	cms9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Χριστοῦ εἶναι & αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	Here Paul could be using the possessive form to refer to how people: (1) represent Christ in a special way. Alternate translation: “he serves Christ in a special way … he serves Christ in a special way, so also do we” (2) belong to Christ as believers. Alternate translation: “he is a Christian … he is a Christian, so also are we” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1118	10:7	z1t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	λογιζέσθω	1	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “he should consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1119	10:7	iyxt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & πάλιν	1	Here, the word this refers ahead to the clauses just as he {is} of Christ, so also {are} we. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “again what follows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1120	10:7	f3i9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “so also are we of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1121	10:8	mezz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers are of Christ (see 10:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I say that because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1122	10:8	y3ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐάν τε	1	Here Paul could be using even if to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. In other words, Paul really is going to boast in a way that he thinks is excessive. Alternate translation: “even when” (2) something that he thinks might be true. In other words, he thinks that the Corinthians might consider his boasting to be excessive. Alternate translation: “even supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1123	10:8	qm9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσότερόν τι	1	Here, the phrase somewhat excessively could mean that Paul is boasting: (1) more than some people would consider proper. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than what is proper” (2) a great deal. Alternate translation: “very much” (3) more than he already has. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than I have already” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1124	10:8	pm42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐξουσίας ἡμῶν, ἧς ἔδωκεν ὁ Κύριος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how we have been authorized by the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1125	10:8	d4zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help you become more faithful to Christ and not to make you want to forsake him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1126	10:8	urjy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ αἰσχυνθήσομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not let people shame me” or “I will not feel shame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1127	10:9	x96q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, the phrase so that could introduce: (1) a general inference or result based on what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “and so” (2) the purpose for which the Lord gave authority to Paul (see 10:8). Alternate translation: “and he gave me authority so that” (3) the purpose for what Paul says in 10:11. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “Let people consider what I am about to say so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1128	10:9	nw6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῶν ἐπιστολῶν	1	Here Paul refers in general to letters he sends to the Corinthians. He is probably including both 1 Corinthians and the other “severe” letter he has already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to Paul’s letters to the Corinthians in general. Alternate translation: “through any letters I write” or “through the letters I have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1129	10:10	c7h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation or reason why the Corinthians might think that Paul is trying to terrify them with his letters (see 10:9). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or reason. Alternate translation: “I mention that since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1130	10:10	x6dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	φησίν	1	Here Paul is quoting what he knows a person or some people in Corinth are saying about him. He does not identify who this person or these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what some people are saying. Alternate translation: “it is said” or “people say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1131	10:10	qrag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αἱ ἐπιστολαὶ μέν, φησίν, βαρεῖαι καὶ ἰσχυραί, ἡ δὲ παρουσία τοῦ σώματος ἀσθενὴς, καὶ ὁ λόγος ἐξουθενημένος.	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “someone says that my letters are indeed weighty and forceful, but my bodily presence is weak and my speech is despised.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1132	10:10	es1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βαρεῖαι	1	Here, Paul is speaking of letters as if they were objects that were weighty. He could mean that people think the letters are: (1) severe or burdensome. Alternate translation: “are burdensome” or “are oppressive” (2) important or impressive. Alternate translation: “are impressive” or “are significant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1133	10:10	b8bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	βαρεῖαι καὶ ἰσχυραί	1	The terms weighty and forceful mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “are very powerful” or “are very forceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1134	10:10	d9i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ & παρουσία τοῦ σώματος	1	Here, the phrase bodily presence refers to how a person looks and acts when they are around other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “his conduct in person” or “his physical bearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1135	10:10	mboc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξουθενημένος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is contemptible” or “is something that people despise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1136	10:11	qf3o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Such a person should consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1137	10:11	m6m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	Here, the phrase such {a person} refers to whoever says that Paul’s letters are powerful but his personal presence is weak (see 10:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly refers back to this person from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “that person” or “anyone who says those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1138	10:11	xvjm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & ὅτι	1	Here, the word this refers to what Paul introduces with the word that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces what the person should consider. Alternate translation: “that” or “the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1139	10:11	kb55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Here, the word word represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in our words” or “in our communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1140	10:11	hu56			τοιοῦτοι	1	Here Paul could be comparing what he and his fellow workers are like in our word with what they: (1) are like in our deed. In this case, Paul is simply comparing word and deed. Alternate translation: “such is what we are” (2) will be like in deed when they visit the Corinthians. In this case, Paul is speaking about what they will do in the future. Alternate translation: “such we will be”
1141	10:11	g58z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ἔργῳ	1	Here, the word deed refers to what Paul and his fellow workers do and will do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in what we do” or “in how we will act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1142	10:12	r9cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verses (10:10–11) in response to what some people say about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1143	10:12	k94z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι	1	The terms classify and compare mean similar things. The word classify refers to considering something to be part of a group, and the word compare refers to evaluating something to see if it is similar to something else. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to compare” or “to include” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1144	10:12	i85y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, or you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by themselves, indeed, comparing themselves with themselves” or “measuring and comparing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1145	10:12	q7i9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς	1	Here, the word themselves could indicate that each person: (1) measures and compares himself by himself or herself by herself. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by their own standard, and comparing themselves with their own standard” (2) measures and compares himself or herself by others in a specific group. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by each other, and comparing themselves with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1146	10:12	n8sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες	1	Here Paul speaks as if people were objects that someone would “measure.” He is speaking about how people compare or contrast themselves with people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “evaluating themselves by themselves” or “assessing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1147	10:12	zwl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ συνιᾶσιν	1	Here Paul does not state what it is that these people do not understand. What he means is that these people are not acting in wise ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not wise” or “do not act with understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1148	10:13	x79x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα	1	Here, the phrase to the immeasurable things could refer to: (1) how Paul and his fellow workers are not boasting beyond what God has “measured” to them. Alternate translation: “about what is not measured to us” (2) how Paul and those with him do not boast without any real standard. Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1149	10:13	a4ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a measure that could: (1) measure things according to a limit or standard. Alternate translation: “the measure based on the standard” (2) define a specific limit or area. Alternate translation: “the measure that identifies the area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1150	10:13	y6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς μέτρου	1	Here, the word measure could: (1) restate what it is that God has assigned to us. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us, which is a measure” (2) how God has assigned the measure of the limit. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us as a measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1151	10:13	fx2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks as if a measure could reach out and touch a person. He means that the measure includes the Corinthians in what it measures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “a measure that included even you” or “a measure that measured even as far as you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1152	10:13	u84l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν	1	Here, the phrase that reached even as far as you indicates that the measure includes the Corinthians as something that Paul and his fellow workers can boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “that reached even as far as you as something we can boast about” or “that extends what we can boast about to include you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1153	10:14	ay6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Here, the word For introduces Paul’s proof that the “limit” he mentioned in the previous verse does reach as far as the Corinthians (see 10:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1154	10:14	ctjf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς	2	Here Paul is indicating that he and his fellow workers have not gone beyond the “limit” that he refers to in 10:13. Express the idea so that the link to the previous verse is clear. Alternate translation: “we are not going beyond our limit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1155	10:14	lefl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul refers to what would need to be true if he and his fellow workers were actually overextending themselves. That would be true only if they did not reach or visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which would only be true if we had not come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1156	10:14	lpiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2	Here, the word for introduces further evidence or proof for Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers were not overextending themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “since in reality” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1157	10:14	wyzv			ἐφθάσαμεν	1	Here, the phrase we came could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers had already visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we went” (2) Paul and his fellow workers visited the Corinthians before Paul’s opponents visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “before anyone else did, we came”
1158	10:15	hu9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:13. Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1159	10:15	l0bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες, αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of hope and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “but hoping, as you increasingly believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1160	10:15	ax6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μεγαλυνθῆναι	1	Here Paul does not state directly what is enlarged. He could mean that: (1) their ministry or work might be enlarged. Alternate translation: “that our ministry might be enlarged” (2) they might be enlarged or praised by the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we might be enlarged” or “that we might be praised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1161	10:15	ff38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μεγαλυνθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that God will enlarge our ministry” or “that God will enlarge us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1162	10:15	djvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν	1	Here, the phrase according to our limit could refer to: (1) a limit or standard according to which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges what he wants them to do. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called us to do” or “in what God wants us to do” (2) the area or places in which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which they serve. Alternate translation: “according to where we serve” or “in the places in which we serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1163	10:15	gqiz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς περισσείαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of abundance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “abundantly” or “in abundant ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1164	10:16	nx8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ ὑπερέκεινα ὑμῶν	1	Here, the phrase the {places} beyond you refers to the areas and people who lived to the west of Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies these areas and people more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the places west of you” or “the places I would go if I traveled through your town” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1165	10:16	xi00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι & τὰ ἕτοιμα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things someone has accomplished in his or her area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1166	10:16	raq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι	1	Here, just as with the word “limit” in 10:15, the word area could refer to: (1) a measure or standard according to which people serve God. In this case, the accomplished things are done according to a measure or standard that fits with someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called other people to do” or “in what God wants others to do” (2) the area or places in which people serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers serve. Alternate translation: “according to where other people serve” or “in the places in which other people serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1167	10:17	t3bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	δὲ	1	Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from Jeremiah 9:24. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “But as Jeremiah wrote in the Scriptures,” or “But as you can read in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1168	10:17	q8cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ & καυχώμενος & καυχάσθω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one boasting must boast” or “any person who boasts needs to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1169	10:18	wfl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (10:17) about how people should boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1170	10:18	btv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος, ἀλλὰ ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “that one whom the Lord commends is approved, not the one commending himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1171	10:18	h81t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος	1	Although the term himself is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that one commending himself or herself” or “those commending themselves are not approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1172	10:18	n5v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord does not approve that one commending himself” or “that one commending himself does not receive approval” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1173	10:18	sy2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord commends is approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1174	11:intro	abce				0	2 Corinthians 11 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10) Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15) Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33) Special Concepts in this Chapter Fools and foolishness Throughout this chapter, Paul refers to being “foolish” or a “fool.” These words refer to a person who makes bad decisions and who cares about things that are not really valuable. It does not primarily refer to someone who does not know very much. Paul argues that the false teachers are “fools,” which means that they make bad decisions and care about things that are not important. He also describes how he is responding to the false teachers as “foolish.” He means that he speaks in ways that he considers to be “foolish,” but he speaks in these ways because he thinks the Corinthians will understand him if he speaks in these “foolish” ways. Consider how you might express the idea of “foolishness” in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]]) False teachers Throughout this chapter, Paul is defending himself against false teachers who were claiming to be better than him and to preach a better gospel than his gospel. Paul never refers to these false teachers by name, but he does call them “false apostles” and “deceitful” (see 11:13). He also responds to some of their claims about themselves in 11:22–23. Paul responds to the false teachers in two primary ways. First, he argues that the things that they boast about and claim for themselves are not important or valuable. Second, he argues that even in these things that are not important, he is better than they are. Make sure that your translation clearly indicates that Paul is responding the false teachers in these ways. Financial support for teachers In this chapter, Paul describes how he did not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching. Paul implies that his opponents, the false teachers, did ask for and receive money. He also implies that the Corinthians thought that the message of the false teachers was more valuable than Paul’s message because they charged money for their teaching. Paul argues in response that he cares more for the Corinthians than the false teachers do. In fact, he states that he can boast more than the false teachers because he did not receive money. Make sure that your translation expresses and implies these ideas. Boasting Just as in the previous chapter, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to “boasting.” In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Marriage metaphor In 11:2, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were a young woman and as if he were the young woman’s father. He intends to marry his daughter to Christ, and he wants to keep his daughter pure and perfect until then. He means that he has helped unite the Corinthians to Christ, and he wants to make sure they stay completely faithful to Christ until Christ comes back. If possible, preserve the marriage metaphor or express it as a simile. See the notes on 11:2 for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Irony Multiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. He does this in 11:5, where he refers to “super-apostles”; in 11:8, where he says that he “robbed other churches”; in 11:19, where he says that the Corinthians gladly bear with the foolish, being wise; and in 11:21, where he says that he speaks according to dishonor that he and his fellow workers have been weak. In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) Rhetorical questions In 11:7, 11, 22–23, 29, Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter The long list in 11:23–28 In 11:23–28, Paul gives a long list of hardships and difficulties he has experienced while he preached the good news. The ULT and UST illustrate different ways to break this list up into pieces. Consider how you might naturally express a long list in your language.
1175	11:1	r4q6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of foolishness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as I act a little foolishly” or “as I now say what is foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1176	11:1	b4dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης	1	Here, the foolishness that Paul refers to is how he is about to boast about his qualifications as an apostle. Paul considers this to be foolishness, but he will boast anyways to help the Corinthians realize that he and the gospel that he preaches come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what foolishness refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I am about to be a little bit foolish” or “in a little bit of foolishness that I am about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1177	11:1	sou7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνέχεσθέ μου	1	Here, this clause could be: (1) a statement of what the Corinthians are already doing, either as they listen to this letter or in the past when Paul visited them. Alternate translation: “but in fact you are already bearing with me” (2) a command to act in this way. Alternate translation: “and in fact you need to bear with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1178	11:2	yozf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul will be a little foolish. Alternate translation: “I will be a little bit foolish since” (2) the reason why the Corinthians should bear with Paul. Alternate translation: “I want you to bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1179	11:2	ubnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεοῦ ζήλῳ	1	Here, the phrase godly jealousy could refer to jealousy: (1) that is the same jealousy that God has. Alternate translation: “with the jealousy that God has” (2) that is from God. Alternate translation: “with jealousy from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1180	11:2	m6vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Θεοῦ ζήλῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of jealousy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God is jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1181	11:2	ee9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ	1	Here Paul speaks as if he is the father of the Corinthians, who together are his daughter. Paul has promised to give his daughter (the Corinthians) as a wife to a man, who is Christ. Until that marriage happens, Paul the father must make sure that his daughter (the Corinthians) remains a pure virgin. If these customs are somewhat similar to what happens in your culture, you could preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. If these customs are not similar to what happens in your culture, you could explain the ideas more clearly or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for I am like your father who has betrothed you to one husband, to present you as a pure virgin to be married to Christ” or “I helped you believe in the Messiah, and I will work hard to help you remain faithful to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1182	11:3	ddrl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul refers to a story in Genesis 3:1–7. In this story, a serpent, whom Paul would have identified as Satan, deceives Eve, the first woman, into eating a fruit that God told her not to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit or include a footnote that explains the story. Alternate translation: “as the serpent, Satan, by his craftiness deceived the first woman, Eve, into disobeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1183	11:3	l2hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of craftiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a crafty way” or “by acting craftily” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1184	11:3	m5zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people might corrupt your minds” or “some person might corrupt your minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1185	11:3	ufsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος	1	The terms sincerity and purity mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “full sincerity” or “complete purity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1186	11:3	sgml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sincerity and purity, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “from how sincere and pure you are to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1187	11:3	gl9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν	1	Here, the phrase {that are} to Christ indicates that the sincerity and purity are directed towards Christ. In other words, the Corinthians think with sincerity and purity in their devotion or loyalty to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that you have for Christ” or “in your faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1188	11:4	wq57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce a reason why: (1) Paul is afraid that someone will corrupt the Corinthians (see 11:3). Alternate translation: “I am afraid of that because” (2) the Corinthians should “bear with” Paul (see 11:1), which is that they “bear with” these false teachers. Alternate translation: “You should bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1189	11:4	era4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ μὲν & ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	Here Paul is speaking as if one coming to the Corinthians and proclaiming another Jesus were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it had already or will actually happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when indeed one coming” or “indeed whenever someone comes and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1190	11:4	zj79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	Here Paul could be referring to: (1) any person or group of people. Alternate translation: “anyone coming” or “any person coming” (2) a specific person whom Paul knows about. Alternate translation: “a person coming” or “that person coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1191	11:4	l7m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνεῦμα ἕτερον	1	Here, the phrase a different spirit could refer to: (1) an evil spirit in contrast to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “a spirit different than the Holy Spirit” (2) an attitude in contrast to the attitude that Paul and his fellow workers offered to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “a different mindset” or “a different attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1192	11:4	fs5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:1. Here Paul means that the Corinthians listen patiently even when false teachers are telling them lies. He does not approve of this behavior, but he uses this clause to link what he is saying here with what he said in 11:1. Alternate translation: “you willingly put up with it” or “you listen attentively to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1193	11:5	l3on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce: (1) a reason why what Paul told them about Jesus, the Spirit, and the gospel (see 11:4) takes priority over what anyone else tells them. Alternate translation: “So, what I taught you has priority, since” (2) a reason why they should “bear with” Paul (see 11:1). Alternate translation: “Further, I want you to bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1194	11:5	ptd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑστερηκέναι τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	Here Paul speaks as if he is not below or short of the “super-apostles”. He means that he does not have less power and authority than they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be less than the ‘super-apostles’” or “to have less authority than the ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1195	11:5	eet1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	Here Paul refers to his opponents, the false teachers, with the words that they themselves or their followers used to describe them: “super-apostles”. He does not actually believe that these people are better apostles or greater than anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective to make a point. Alternate translation: “of the so-called ‘super-apostles’” or “of those who consider themselves super-apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1196	11:6	v1o7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1197	11:6	qdx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & καὶ ἰδιώτης	1	Here Paul could be using the phrase even if I am untrained to: (1) acknowledge that he is untrained in speaking well. Alternate translation: “even though I am untrained” (2) acknowledge that some people think that he is untrained in speaking well, even though he does not agree with this. Alternate translation: “even were I untrained” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1198	11:6	jsrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Here Paul is referring to the practice of speaking in public in order to persuade many people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in public speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1199	11:6	f8d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ γνώσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of knowledge, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in knowing the gospel” or “in understanding the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1200	11:6	berv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ γνώσει	1	Here, the word knowledge refers to what a person knows about Jesus and the good news about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in knowledge about Jesus” or “in knowledge about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1201	11:6	n7xy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ & ἐν πᾶσιν	1	Here the phrases in everything and in all things could indicate that Paul and his coworkers make things clear: (1) in every way possible and in everything they say and do. Alternate translation: “in every way … in all we do” (2) in every way possible and among all people. Alternate translation: “in every way … among all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1202	11:6	bb1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φανερώσαντες	1	Here Paul implies that what he makes clear is that he has knowledge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having made the fact that I have knowledge clear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1203	11:7	nrmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἢ	1	The word Or introduces an alternate to what Paul said in the previous verse, where he stated that he has “knowledge” (see 11:6). With Or, then, Paul introduces a question that raises another possible objection to his authority as an apostle: he did not charge them money for teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Or with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “But” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1204	11:7	un9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν?	1	Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that he did not commit a sin. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But I certainly did not commit a sin, humbling myself so that you yourselves might be exalted, because I preached the gospel of God to you without payment!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1205	11:7	azyr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν	1	Here Paul refers to how he worked to make money for himself. In his culture, this was humbling, since good speakers and teachers would not need to do extra work, because they would make enough money from the people they taught. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “humbling myself by supporting myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1206	11:7	yrqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “I might exalt you yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1207	11:7	jhve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε	1	Here, the word translated yourselves emphasizes you. Consider using a natural way to emphasize you in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed might be exalted” or “it was you who might be exalted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1208	11:7	ax51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a gospel that could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the gospel that came from God” (2) come from and be about God. Alternate translation: “the gospel from and about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1209	11:8	k6ds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα	1	Here Paul refers to receiving money from other churches to support himself as he served the Corinthians as if it were robbery. He means that he received money from these churches and did not give them anything in return, which some people would consider robbery. He uses this strong language to indicate how much he and the other churches sacrificed to help the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly indicates that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective and overstating what he means. Alternate translation: “It was as if I robbed other churches” or “Some might say that I robbed other churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1210	11:8	jqsv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαβὼν ὀψώνιον πρὸς τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν	1	Here Paul implies that the other churches paid him a wage, but so that he could serve the Corinthians, not them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having accepted a wage from them but used it for the ministry to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1211	11:9	br6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑστερηθεὶς	1	Here Paul implies that he lacked or did not have enough of what he needed to live, including things like food and clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having lacked what is necessary for life” or “having lacked basic necessities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1212	11:9	qj8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ κατενάρκησα	1	Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy burden that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not trouble” or “I did not ask for money and so harass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1213	11:9	a23k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul may not only be referring to men. It is possible that he is referring only to men, but he may also include women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the siblings” or “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1214	11:9	kp9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1215	11:9	fc6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω	1	Here, just as at the beginning of the verse, the burden refers to asking for money. Express the idea as you did at the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “I did not and will continue not to trouble you” or “I did not and will continue not to ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1216	11:9	sqcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω	1	Here Paul is indicating that he was not a burden to them when he visited them in the past, and he promises that he will never be a burden to them in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “I have kept and will always keep” or “in the past I kept and in the future will keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1217	11:10	fohm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ, ὅτι	1	The phrase The truth of Christ is in me is an oath formula that Paul uses to show that what he is about to say is true. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “As the truth of Christ is in me,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula]])
1218	11:10	si2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	Here Paul could be using the possessive form to indicate that: (1) he is truthful like Christ was truthful. Alternate translation: “I am truthful, like Christ was” (2) he has received truth from Christ. Alternate translation: “The truth from Christ is in me” (3) he speaks what is true about Christ. Alternate translation: “The truth about Christ is in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1219	11:10	mth0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am as truthful as the Messiah is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1220	11:10	t4tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ καύχησις αὕτη	1	Here Paul refers to how he boasts about not accepting money from the Corinthians when he told them about the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this boasting about how I have not burdened you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1221	11:10	n60n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ	1	Here Paul speaks as if his boasting were a door that will not be shut to him. He means that no one will be able to keep him from boasting or prove that what he says is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of mine will not be stifled” or “will not be proved wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1222	11:10	nae3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can shut this boasting to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1223	11:10	ua2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τῆς Ἀχαΐας	1	Here Paul refers to the regions that together make up the province of Achaia. He refers to the regions to indicate that there is no place in the entire province in which someone can keep him from boasting or prove what he says wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in all of Achaia” or “in the entire province of Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1224	11:11	avdr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τί	1	Here Paul asks for the reason why he does not “burden” the Corinthians (see 11:9). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Why do I not burden you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1225	11:11	zqu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς?	1	Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that his reason for not burdening them was not that he did not love them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these two questions as statements or as exclamations, or you could combine them into one statement. Alternate translation: “I have a reason for this. However, it is not that I do not love you!” or “My reason is not that I do not love you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1226	11:11	rj6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν	1	Here Paul states that God knows something. He implies that God knows that Paul does in fact love the Corinthians. The phrase God knows makes the claim stronger, since God is the one who can prove that the claim is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God himself knows that I love you” or “You can know for sure that I love you, since God knows it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1227	11:12	qjqa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces the real reason why Paul does not burden the Corinthians, in contrast to the false reason he denied in the previous verse (see 11:11). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1228	11:12	jecy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ & ποιῶ, καὶ ποιήσω	1	Here, the phrase what I do refers to how Paul does not ask for money from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the referent for this phrase explicit. Alternate translation: “I will also continue not accepting money from you” or “I will also continue not burdening you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1229	11:12	d9sl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκόψω	1	Here Paul speaks of removing an opportunity as it were cutting off or destroying something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I may defeat” or “I may remove” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1230	11:12	b9rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	Here, the word opportunity refers to a chance or ability to do something. Paul explains what the opportunity relates to by using the clause that in what they are boasting about they may be found just as we also {are}. Use a form that clearly introduces what an opportunity relates to. Alternate translation: “any opportunity of the ones desiring an opportunity to be found just as we also are in what they are boasting about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1231	11:12	x0md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of opportunity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what some people want to happen, which is that” or “what is desired by the ones who desire that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1232	11:12	rcfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται	1	Here Paul is referring generally to anything a person might boast about. He is not identifying a specific thing that people boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in anything they boast about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1233	11:12	t4js		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῶσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others might find them” or “people might consider them to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1234	11:13	p77j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (9:15) about people who desire to be equal in boasting with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1235	11:13	ml66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & τοιοῦτοι	1	The pronoun ones refers to the people Paul mentioned in the previous verse who desire to be equal in boasting to Paul. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more explicitly. Alternate translation: “people of that kind” or “the ones who desire that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1236	11:13	y896		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους	1	Here Paul means that these false apostles intentionally look and act like true apostles, even though they are not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “posing as true apostles” or “acting as if they were apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1237	11:14	v9z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ θαῦμα	1	Here, the phrase no wonder indicates that what Paul just said about people pretending to be apostles should not be surprising. Use a form that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “that is no surprise” or “we should not be astonished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1238	11:14	ss7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ὁ Σατανᾶς	1	Here, the word translated himself emphasizes Satan. Consider using a natural way to emphasize Satan in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan indeed” or “Satan too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1239	11:14	g4ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός	1	See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of 11:13. Alternate translation: “poses as an angel of light” or “acts as if he were an angel of light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1240	11:14	zeec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἄγγελον φωτός	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe an angel that is characterized by light. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shining angel” or “a bright angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1241	11:14	mld4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄγγελον φωτός	1	Here, Paul speaks of the glory and power of an angel as if it were light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “angel of glory” or “angel of splendor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1242	11:15	lq6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ μέγα & εἰ	1	Here, the clause {it is} no great thing indicates that what follows is not surprising or shocking but should be expected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different clause that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “it should be no shock if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1243	11:15	fvx7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μέγα	1	Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, no, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, great thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1244	11:15	w2sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1245	11:15	sb58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης	1	See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of 11:13. Alternate translation: “pose as servants of righteousness” or “act as if they were servants of righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1246	11:15	unyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect servants with righteousness. He could be describing servants: (1) whose goal is righteousness, that is, to make people righteous. Alternate translation: “servants who make people righteous” (2) who serve for the sake of righteousness. Alternate translation: “servants for what is right” (3) who are righteous. Alternate translation: “righteous servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1247	11:15	tpjp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “servants who make others righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1248	11:15	kour		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὧν τὸ τέλος ἔσται κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul refers to how these servants will in the end be judged and punished for their works. He does not make it clear whether he is referring to the end of their lives or to the end of this time, when Jesus comes back. It is recommended that you use a form that refers in general to how people are punished or suffer for the bad things that they do. Alternate translation: “who will in the end get what they deserve” or “who will eventually be punished for what they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1249	11:16	ejcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here Paul could be using the word again to refer to: (1) what he said in 11:1 about how he wanted the Corinthians to bear with his foolishness. Alternate translation: “what I have already said” (2) what he said in 11:13–15 about how he is different from his foolish opponents. Alternate translation: “again what I just said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1250	11:16	rlov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & μή	1	Here Paul uses the conditional form to introduce something that he thinks may or may not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that could happen. Alternate translation: “even if not” or “were that not to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1251	11:16	ba48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ & μή	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “if you do think me to be foolish” or “if you do not listen to that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1252	11:16	s962		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι	1	Here Paul wants the Corinthians to let him do what fools do if they think that he is a fool. He implies that people let fools boast and say crazy things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “allow me to act like a fool among you so that I too may boast a little bit like fools do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1253	11:17	bz16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ λαλῶ	1	Here Paul refers to what he is about to say in the rest of this chapter and in the following chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “What I am going to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1254	11:17	ejid			κατὰ Κύριον	1	Here, the phrase according to the Lord could refer to: (1) how someone represents the Lord. Alternate translation: “as I speak for the Lord” (2) how the Lord spoke. Alternate translation: “in the ways in which the Lord spoke”
1255	11:17	ftvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of foolishness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a foolish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1256	11:17	x6hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει	1	Here, the word situation could refer to: (1) what Paul has done that gives him a reason to boast. Alternate translation: “this basis” (2) how Paul is currently in the process of boasting. Alternate translation: “this matter” or “this act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1257	11:17	mfmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει τῆς καυχήσεως	1	Here Paul could be using the possessive to describe: (1) the situation that is the basis of or proof for the boasting. Alternate translation: “in this situation about which I boast” (2) the situation in which he is boasting. Alternate translation: “in this situation in which I boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1258	11:17	jq1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει τῆς καυχήσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of situation and boasting, you could express the same ideas in another way. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous notes. Alternate translation: “in what happened that allows me to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1259	11:18	lmaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ	1	Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to refer many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1260	11:18	t4ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses the phrase according to the flesh to refer to human ways of thinking and acting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1261	11:19	asjr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verses (11:16–18) about how he wants the Corinthians to listen to him even if they think he is foolish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You can listen to me since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1262	11:19	si6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἡδέως & ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων, φρόνιμοι ὄντες	1	Here Paul speaks from the perspective of some of the Corinthians, who think that they are wise and that he is foolish. He speaks in this way to show them that how they are thinking is silly and wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more clearly shows that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “in your view you gladly bear with the foolish, since you think you are wise” or “according to some people, you are wise, so you gladly bear with the foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1263	11:19	s2at		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἀφρόνων	1	Paul is using the adjective foolish as a noun to refer to people who are foolish. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “any foolish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1264	11:19	u3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὄντες	1	Here, the word being introduces the basis or reason why the Corinthians can bear with the foolish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1265	11:20	c97v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces examples of what Paul said in the previous verse (11:19) about how the Corinthians “bear with the foolish.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces examples. Alternate translation: “For example,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1266	11:20	zmfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει, εἴ τις λαμβάνει, εἴ τις ἐπαίρεται, εἴ τις εἰς πρόσωπον ὑμᾶς δέρει	1	Paul speaks as if these were hypothetical situations, but he means that they have indeed happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as simple statements. Alternate translation: “when anyone enslaves you, when anyone devours {you}, when anyone takes advantage {of you}, when anyone exalts {himself}, when anyone hits you in the face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1267	11:20	lu7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ	1	Here Paul speaks as if some people make the Corinthians into slaves. He means that these people treated them like slaves and made them obey every one of their wishes and commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express the idea. Alternate translation: “makes you like their slaves” or “causes you to serve them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1268	11:20	sr4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατεσθίει	1	Here Paul speaks as if some people were eating the Corinthians. He means that these people were using up the money and goods the Corinthians had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language to express the idea. Alternate translation: “consumes you” or “spends everything you have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1269	11:20	t27r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπαίρεται	1	Here Paul implies that these people are exalting themselves over the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “exalts himself over you” or “claims he is greater than you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1270	11:20	kn2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐπαίρεται	1	Although the term himself is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Most likely the person who exalts would be a man, but Paul is not making this claim. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “exalts himself or herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1271	11:20	yn5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς πρόσωπον ὑμᾶς δέρει	1	Here, the phrase hits you in the face could refer to: (1) a direct insult, which is like slapping someone in the face. Alternate translation: “acts like they are hitting you in the face” or “strongly insults you” (2) an actual slap on someone’s face. Alternate translation: “slaps you across the face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1272	11:21	n8s9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν!	1	Here Paul speaks from the perspective of someone who thinks that what Paul spoke about in the previous verse is the right way to show honor and power. What he means is that if his opponents are correct, the way he treated the Corinthians should lead to dishonor and show that he is weak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking from someone else’s point of view. Alternate translation: “According to those people, I would have to speak according to dishonor, namely that we ourselves have been weak” or “They might say that according to dishonor we ourselves have been weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1273	11:21	xt0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω	1	Here, the clause According to dishonor I speak means that what Paul is about to say causes dishonor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What I speak dishonors me” or “It is dishonorable that I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1274	11:21	ei5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ ἀτιμίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of dishonor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In a way that dishonors me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1275	11:21	zjjy			λέγω ὡς ὅτι	1	Here, the words translated namely, that could: (1) introduce what it is that Paul speaks. Alternate translation: “I speak that” (2) introduce what Paul speaks as something that he does not fully agree with. Alternate translation: “I say that it is possible that”
1276	11:21	rtcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν	1	Here, the word translated ourselves emphasizes we. Consider using a natural way to emphasize we in your language. Alternate translation: “it is we who have been weak” or “we indeed have been weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1277	11:21	rwgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ (ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω), τολμῶ κἀγώ	1	Here, the phrase I am speaking in foolishness describes what Paul says in this verse. You can move this clause to wherever is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I am speaking in foolishness, in whatever {way} anyone might be bold, I too am bold” or “in whatever {way} anyone might be bold, I too am bold, although I am speaking in foolishness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1278	11:21	v8a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ & τολμῶ κἀγώ	1	Here Paul speaks about being bold while doing anything, but he particularly focuses on being bold in boasting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in whatever boast anyone might be bold to make … I too am bold to make a boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1279	11:21	vqbu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of foolishness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “foolishly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1280	11:22	jdq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἑβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ.	1	Paul is using the question form to compare himself to what his opponents claim to be. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as comparisons or statements. Alternate translation: “If they are Hebrews, I am also. If they are Israelites, I am also. If they are offspring of Abraham, I am also.” or “When they claim to be Hebrews, so do I. When they claim to be Israelites, so do I. When they claim to be offspring of Abraham, so do I.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1281	11:22	c4zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ	1	In this verse, the word offspring is singular in form, but it refers to many offspring as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “members of the offspring of Abraham” or “descended from Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1282	11:23	a4tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ	1	Just as in 11:22, Paul is using the question form to compare himself to what his opponents claim to be. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as comparisons or statements. Alternate translation: “If they are servants of Christ, (I speak as being insane) I am also.” or “When they claim to be servants of Christ, (I speak as being insane) so do I.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1283	11:23	pgv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ	1	Here, the clause I speak {as} being insane is a parenthetical comment on Paul’s question and answer. You could put the clause wherever it would most naturally appear in your language. Alternate translation: “(I speak {as} being insane.) Are they servants of Christ? I {am} more so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1284	11:23	bq23			παραφρονῶν λαλῶ	1	Alternate translation: “I speak like someone who is insane”
1285	11:23	dr6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of inprisonments, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “more abundantly being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1286	11:23	qdcm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως	1	Paul could be describing beatings that are beyond measure because: (1) Paul was struck or hit many times. Alternate translation: “in beatings with many lashes” or “in frequent beatings” (2) the beatings were very severe. Alternate translation: “in very severe beatings” or “in extremely painful beatings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1287	11:23	r6jv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις	1	Here, to be in {danger of} deaths indicates that Paul was in situations in which he could have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “often almost dying” or “frequently being near to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1288	11:23	pf0p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν θανάτοις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deaths, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1289	11:24	ttz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν	1	This phrase refers to how in Jewish law a person could be whipped at most 40 times (see Deuteronomy 25:3). Often people would whip a person only 39 times to be sure that they did not go over 40. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit or use a footnote to explain the phrase. Alternate translation: “39 lashes, the most they allow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1290	11:25	bwzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐραβδίσθην	1	Here Paul refers to how the Roman authorities would sometimes punish people. They would have someone hit the person they wished to punish with a wooden stick multiple times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to that kind of punishment. Alternate translation: “people struck me with wooden sticks” or “Roman leaders punished me by having people hit me with canes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1291	11:25	u9xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐραβδίσθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone beat me with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1292	11:25	xk9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλιθάσθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “crowds of people stoned me” or “others stoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1293	11:25	o0zy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐναυάγησα	1	Here Paul refers to how ships that sailed on the ocean could break apart or sink. When this happened, people had to try to survive in the water or swim to shore. Often, many people would die by drowning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of event. Alternate translation: “a ship I was on sank” or “a ship on which I was sailing broke apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1294	11:25	q6tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐναυάγησα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a ship on which I was sailing wrecked” or “a ship I was on sank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1295	11:25	b4kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νυχθήμερον	1	Here the phrase a night and a day refers to a full period of 24 hours. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “a full day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1296	11:25	df3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ βυθῷ	1	Here, the phrase the deep refers to the ocean, specifically to the parts of the ocean that are far away from land. Paul means that he was stranded in the ocean water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this area of the ocean. Alternate translation: “by myself in the middle of the sea” or “floating on the open sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1297	11:26	v8gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁδοιπορίαις πολλάκις, κινδύνοις	1	Here, the phrase often in journeys could: (1) give the situation in which all the other dangers occur. Alternate translation: “during my frequent journeys I have been in dangers” (2) be one of the dangerous things Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “in frequent journeys” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1298	11:26	wddz			κινδύνοις ποταμῶν, κινδύνοις λῃστῶν, κινδύνοις ἐκ γένους, κινδύνοις ἐξ ἐθνῶν, κινδύνοις ἐν πόλει, κινδύνοις ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, κινδύνοις ἐν θαλάσσῃ, κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις	1	Here Paul repeats the word dangers to emphasize how much danger he was in all the time. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul repeats himself, and if it would not emphasize danger in your language, you could refer to dangers once and emphasize the danger in another way. Alternate translation: “in frequent dangers from rivers, from robbers, from my own countrymen, from Gentiles, in the city, in the wilderness, at sea, and from false brothers”
1299	11:26	lp2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κινδύνοις ποταμῶν, κινδύνοις λῃστῶν, κινδύνοις ἐκ γένους, κινδύνοις ἐξ ἐθνῶν, κινδύνοις ἐν πόλει, κινδύνοις ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, κινδύνοις ἐν θαλάσσῃ, κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of dangers, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being endangered by rivers, being endangered by robbers, being endangered by my own countrymen, being endangered by Gentiles, being endangered in the city, being endangered in the wilderness, being endangered on the sea, being endangered by false brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1300	11:26	myhk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γένους	1	Here Paul refers to other people from his country and nation. These people would be Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “people from my own nation” or “Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1301	11:26	b3j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ψευδαδέλφοις	1	Paul is using the term false brothers to mean people who pretend to share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false believers” or “people who falsely claim to be believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1302	11:26	m8y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ψευδαδέλφοις	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “false brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1303	11:27	fd61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις πολλάκις, ἐν λιμῷ καὶ δίψει, ἐν νηστείαις πολλάκις, ἐν ψύχει καὶ γυμνότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas in this verse, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I labor and toil, often sleep little, am hungry and thirsty, often fast, and am often cold and naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1304	11:27	lx1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ	1	Here, the words translated hard work and hardship mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “difficult labor” or “tiring toil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1305	11:27	ptq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γυμνότητι	1	Here, the word nakedness refers generally to having too little clothing. It does not necessarily mean that Paul had no clothes at all, although that could have been true sometimes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “without proper clothing” or “being ill-clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1306	11:28	tq1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χωρὶς τῶν παρεκτὸς	1	Here, the phrase apart from the other things could be referring to: (1) many other hardships that Paul does not mention. This would mean that he is now going to mention one last hardship. Alternate translation: “besides everything else I suffer” or “beyond any other hardships” (2) the hardships he has already mentioned, which are external. This would mean that he is now going to mention internal hardships. Alternate translation: “apart from those external things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1307	11:28	n1q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of care and concern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I care every day as I am concerned for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1308	11:28	zf14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	The terms care and concern mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “there is my concern for all the churches every day” or “there is my concerned care every day for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1309	11:28	fhdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe concern that is directed toward all the churches. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “the concern for all the churches” or “the concern I have for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1310	11:29	fvz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ?	1	Paul is using the question form to show that he is weak when other believers are weak. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If anyone is weak, I too am weak!” or “I am weak when others are weak!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1311	11:29	vxw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ	1	Here Paul could be indicating that: (1) he sympathizes with people who are weak by becoming weak himself. Alternate translation: “Who is weak, and I do not sympathize by also being weak” (2) when others are weak, it makes Paul weak too. Alternate translation: “Who is weak, and I do not become weak as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1312	11:29	bdd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?	1	Paul is using the question form to show that he is inflamed when other believers are caused to stumble. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If anyone is caused to stumble, I am inflamed!” or “I am inflamed when others are caused to stumble!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1313	11:29	ob3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whom do others cause to stumble, and I do not become inflamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1314	11:29	xu57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίζεται	1	Here Paul speaks of helping or causing another person to sin as if it were making that person stumble. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “is caused to sin” or “is led into sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1315	11:29	g5am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?	1	Here Paul speaks as if he were like a fire that could become inflamed. He could mean that: (1) he becomes angry in response to people being caused to stumble. Alternate translation: “I do not get angry” or “I do not feel fury” (2) he feels sympathy or shares in the stumbling. Alternate translation: “I do not feel sympathy” or “I am not distressed in response” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1316	11:30	nxh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “When” or “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1317	11:30	gxe6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe things about him that are characterized by weakness. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “weak things about me” or “the weaknesses I have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1318	11:30	z8z0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weakness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things about me that are weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1319	11:31	nuc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ	1	Father is an important title for God. Both God and Father refer to God. This phrase could mean that: (1) God is both God and Father to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “The God of the Lord Jesus, who is the Father” (2) God is Father to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1320	11:31	m5vo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ ὢν	1	Here, the phrase the one refers to The God and Father. Alternate translation: “the God who is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1321	11:31	zpkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὢν εὐλογητὸς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Paul implies that everything God created does it.. Alternate translation: “whom all things bless” or “whom all creation blesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1322	11:31	mpwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of eternity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at all times” or “eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1323	11:31	gb7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἶδεν	1	Here Paul states that God knows that Paul is not lying. The statement that God knows makes the claim stronger, since God is the one who can prove that the claim is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he himself knows” or “guarantees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1324	11:31	no05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	Here Paul could be referring to: (1) what he has already said and what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I am saying” (2) what Paul is about to say in the following verses. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I will say” (3) what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1325	11:31	yx8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, not, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, lying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “I am definitely speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1326	11:32	n383		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁρέτα	1	Here, the word Aretas is the name of a man who was a king. He obeyed what the Roman leaders required, and they let him be king over an area that included the city of Damascus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1327	11:32	kwku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως	1	Here the phrase under Aretas the king indicates that the ethnarch was appointed by Aretas and did what he said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who obeyed Aretas the king” or “who ruled under Aretas the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1328	11:32	j7de		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαμασκηνῶν	1	Here, the word Damascenes refers generally to people who live in the city of Damascus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1329	11:32	cpg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν πόλιν Δαμασκηνῶν	1	Here, the phrase the city of Damascenes is another way to refer to the city Damascus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to that city in whatever way is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his city” or “the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1330	11:33	i8xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ θυρίδος ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην διὰ τοῦ τείχους	1	Here Paul describes how he escaped from the city of Damascus (see Acts 9:23–25). His friends put him in a basket, a large bowl most likely made out of woven rope or plant stems. They attached a rope to the basket and lowered Paul out a window or opening that was in the wall. If it would be helpful in your language, you could more explicitly explain how this action was done. Alternate translation: “I was put in a basket and lowered by rope through a window that was in the wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1331	11:33	uk9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐχαλάσθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that friends, who were probably fellow believers, did it. Alternate translation: “friends lowered me” or “other Christians lowered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1332	11:33	uitt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	Here, the word and introduces what happened as a result of him being lowered in a basket. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “so” or “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1333	11:33	aw7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the phrase his hands represents the power or servants of the “ethnarch,” that is, the local ruler of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his power” or “the people he sent to seize me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1334	12:intro	abcf				0	2 Corinthians 12 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10) Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10) Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13) Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18) Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10) Special Concepts in this Chapter Paul’s trip to heaven In 12:1–6, Paul speaks about how he temporarily ascended to heaven 14 years before he wrote this letter. He speaks about this experience in the third person to avoid directly boasting about himself. Also, he gives very few details about his experience. He describes how he went to the third heaven and paradise, that he heard words he cannot tell to others, and that he is not sure whether he ascended in his body or without his body (which would be either spiritually or in a dream). Paul gives enough details to show that he really did ascend to heaven, but he does not want to tell the Corinthians about what he learned and saw there. In other words, he only “boasts” about this experience to show the Corinthians that he is truly an apostle even according to their standards. However, he thinks it is better to boast about how Christ works through him when he is weak, which is Christ’s standard for being an apostle. The third heaven and Paradise In Paul’s culture, many people believed that there were different levels or layers in heaven, but they disagreed on how many levels or layers there were. Some people thought that there was only one layer, while others thought that there were three, five, seven, or ten layers. Because of the various options, we cannot be sure whether the “third heaven” is the highest heaven or whether it is the third out of more layers of heaven. When Paul uses the word “Paradise,” he is most likely referring to the place where believers go after they die and before they resurrect. The way he refers to Paradise could imply either that it is the third heaven or that it is part of the third heaven. However, we cannot be sure about this either. Since we do not know Paul’s view about the layers of heaven or about the location of Paradise, it is best not to include any implied information on these issues in your translation. The thorn in the flesh In 12:7–8, Paul refers to a “thorn in the flesh” that was given to him. He further names this “thorn” as a “messenger of Satan.” There are three primary possibilities for what the thorn could be. First, it could be some kind of sickness, disease, or ailment. Second, it could be opposition from other people who wish to stop Paul from preaching the gospel. Third, it could a demon who tries to keep Paul from serving Christ. However, since we do not know anything else about this “thorn,” it is impossible to identify exactly what Paul is writing about. What is clear is that the “thorn” makes Paul’s life difficult and painful. Your translation should be general enough to allow for all of these interpretations since Paul’s language is also this general. Financial support for teachers In this chapter, Paul continues to state that he did not and will not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching, and Paul’s opponents apparently did so. Paul, however, does not do so, and he explains further in this chapter why he acts in that way. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter. Boasting Just as in the previous two chapters, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapters. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]]) Paul’s third visit In 12:14 and in 12:20–21, Paul refers to visiting the Corinthians for a third time. He had only visited them twice by the time he wrote this letter, but he plans to visit them again. This visit would happen sometime after the Corinthians received this letter. We do know that Paul visited the Corinthians again because he wrote a later letter, Romans, from the city of Corinth. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical questions In 12:13, 15, 17–19, Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Irony Multiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. In 12:11, he uses irony when he refers to the false teachers as “super-apostles.” He uses irony again in 12:13, where he exclaims, “Forgive me this injustice!” He uses irony again in 12:16, where he says, “I myself did not burden you, but, being crafty, I caught you by deceit.” In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Paul uses the third person to speak about himself In 12:2–5, Paul speaks about a person whom he knows. This person ascended into heaven and heard amazing things. However, in 12:6–7, Paul speaks as if these “revelations” were things he himself had experienced. Paul must have been speaking about himself when he referred to a person he knows. Most likely, he does this to avoid directly boasting about himself (see 12:5–6). He would rather boast about how Christ gives him power when he is weak. If possible, preserve how Paul speaks about himself in the third person. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1335	12:1	e7q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καυχᾶσθαι & οὐ συμφέρον μέν & δὲ	1	Here, the phrase not profitable could go with: (1) I will go on to visions and revelations of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to boast: even though it is not profitable,” (2) It is necessary to boast. Alternate translation: “to boast, though it is not profitable. But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1336	12:1	iur3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλεύσομαι & εἰς	1	Here Paul speaks of moving on to a new topic as if he were physically moving to a new location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will now speak about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1337	12:1	iwn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις	1	The terms visions and revelations mean similar things. It is possible that visions refers to experiences in which someone sees amazing things, while revelations refers to experiences in which someone learns amazing things in general. Paul uses both words to refer in general to all these kinds of experiences. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express Paul’s general focus with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “revelations” or “various visions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1338	12:1	rb42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe visions and revelations that could: (1) come from the Lord. Alternate translation: “visions and revelations from the Lord” (2) be about the Lord. Alternate translation: “visions and revelations about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1339	12:2	n5hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ πρὸ ἐτῶν δεκατεσσάρων (εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα, ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν), ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, the clauses whether in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows interrupt the sentence to indicate that Paul does not know exactly what form the ascent into heaven took. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move these clauses to wherever they would naturally appear in your language. Alternate translation: “Whether this happened in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows. However it happened, I know about a man in Christ who was caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1340	12:2	cz7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ πρὸ ἐτῶν δεκατεσσάρων & ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ	1	In 12:2–5, Paul uses the third person to speak about a person who traveled to the third heaven. It is clear from 12:6–7 that he is actually speaking about himself. So, Paul uses the third person to avoid boasting directly about himself. If possible, use the third person in 12:2–5 and reveal later that Paul himself is this man. If necessary, you could reveal in this verse that Paul is speaking about himself. Make sure your translation here fits with how you translate 12:3–5. Alternate translation: “I know a man in Christ … such a man having been caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago. That man is me.” or “I know a man in Christ, that is, me … I was caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1341	12:2	fawy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, indicates that the man believes in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to a believer or Christian. Alternate translation: “man united to Christ” or “a believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1342	12:2	fth2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα	1	Here Paul refers to a common question related to stories about people traveling to heaven: in what way does the person ascend into heaven? There were three primary ways a person could ascend: they could go into heaven physically in their body, they could go into heaven in a dream, or they could go into heaven with only their non-physical part, that is, their spirit. Here Paul indicates that he does not know in what way the man in Christ ascended into heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whether in bodily form, I do not know, or not in bodily form, I do not know” or “whether physically, I do not know, or spiritually, I do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1343	12:2	da25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα	1	Here Paul repeats I do not know in order to emphasize his lack of knowledge. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “whether in the body or out of the body, I certainly do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1344	12:2	dg7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that it was God. Alternate translation: “God having caught up such a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1345	12:2	k4aw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ	1	Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to the third heaven. Since he does not specify how many heavens he thinks there are, it is best not to clarify whether this is the highest heaven or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers more clearly to the third out of multiple heavens. Alternate translation: “up to the third out of multiple heavens” or “into the third sphere of heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1346	12:3	notz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word And introduces a restatement of the previous verse with some new information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a restatement. Alternate translation: “I repeat,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1347	12:3	idrl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ οἶδα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνθρωπον (εἴτε ἐν σώματι εἴτε χωρὶς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα, ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν),	1	Just as in the previous verse, the clauses whether in body, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows interrupt the main sentence, which continues into the next verse. Use the same form you used in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Whether this happened in the body or out of the body, I do not know, God knows. However it happened, I know about such a man,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1348	12:3	pkl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	οἶδα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνθρωπον	1	Here Paul continues to speak about himself in the third person. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate 12:2. Alternate translation: “I know that such a man, that is, me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1349	12:3	ow23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐν σώματι εἴτε χωρὶς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα	1	Here Paul again addresses the question about whether the man went into heaven in bodily form or not. He uses almost the same words he used in 12:2, although he does not repeat I do not know here. Translate these words as you did in 12:2. Alternate translation: “whether in bodily form or not in bodily form, I do not know” or “whether physically or spiritually, I do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1350	12:4	wm7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον, καὶ ἤκουσεν ἄρρητα ῥήματα, ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι	1	Here Paul continues to speak about himself in the third person. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate 12:2–3. Alternate translation: “he, by which I mean I, was caught up into Paradise and heard inexpressible words which are not permitted for a man to speak” or “he was caught up into Paradise and heard inexpressible words which are not permitted for a man to speak. Again, that man is me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1351	12:4	qv5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον, καὶ ἤκουσεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that it was God. Alternate translation: “God caught him up into Paradise and he heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1352	12:4	ic45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν Παράδεισον	1	Here, the word Paradise refers to a place in heaven where those who have trusted in God live after they die and before Jesus comes back. Paul does not explicitly state whether Paradise is the “third heaven” or, more likely, within the “third heaven.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place where believing people go immediately after they die. Alternate translation: “the place of the believing dead” or “the abode of the dead in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1353	12:4	rdqr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄρρητα ῥήματα, ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι	1	The terms inexpressible and which are not permitted for a man to speak mean similar things. It is possible that inexpressible indicates that people are unable to speak these amazing words, and which are not permitted indicates that God does not allow people to speak these words. If you do not have clear ways to express these two ideas and if it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “words which a man cannot speak” or “amazing and unrepeatable words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1354	12:4	jwof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “which a man cannot speak” or “which God does not permit a man to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1355	12:4	dlb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπῳ	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “for a human” or “for a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1356	12:5	hpq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὑπὲρ τοῦ τοιούτου, καυχήσομαι, ὑπὲρ δὲ ἐμαυτοῦ, οὐ καυχήσομαι	1	Here Paul finishes talking about himself in the third person. It is clear here that he does so in order to avoid boasting about himself. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated 12:2–4. If you have not yet revealed that Paul is speaking about himself, this verse may be a good time to do so. Alternate translation: “On behalf of such a man, who is really myself, I will boast. But on behalf of myself I will not directly boast” or “Since I am that man, I could boast about myself. However, I will not boast about myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1357	12:5	i12f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I will only boast in my weaknesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
1358	12:5	y3cw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weaknesses, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how weak I am” or “about the many ways in which I am weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1359	12:6	a61a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse (12:5). He wishes to say that he could properly boast about the man who ascended to heaven, since that man is himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1360	12:6	pkx7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν & θελήσω καυχήσασθαι, οὐκ ἔσομαι ἄφρων, ἀλήθειαν γὰρ ἐρῶ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. He has decided that he will not boast. However, he wants to speak about what would be true if he did actually boast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker knows is not true. Alternate translation: “were I actually to desire to boast, I would not be a fool, for I would be speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
1361	12:6	adg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀλήθειαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1362	12:6	pc8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	φείδομαι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I refrain from boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1363	12:6	krnt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ	1	Here, the phrase think more of me refers to how people can think a person is greater or more powerful than they actually are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “would consider me to be greater than” or “would think more highly of me than” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1364	12:6	p8fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1	Here Paul refers to what people can observe him doing and saying. He wants people to think about him only based on what they see him doing and hear him saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what he sees me do or hears me say” or “what he knows about my deeds and words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1365	12:6	m57l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	βλέπει	1	Although the term he is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “he or she” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1366	12:7	v5s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων, διὸ ἵνα μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι	1	Here, the phrase because of the surpassing {nature} of the revelations could go with: (1) this verse. In this case, the word therefore is in an unusual position in the middle of the sentence, and you may need to move it to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore, because of the surpassing nature of revelations, so that I would not become super arrogant” (2) the end of the previous verse. If you follow this interpretation, you will need to end the previous verse with no punctuation. Alternate translation: “and also because of the surpassing nature of the revelations. Therefore, so that I would not become super arrogant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1367	12:7	xxi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the revelations as surpassing. He could mean that the revelations: (1) were very great. Alternate translation: “because of how amazing the revelations were” (2) were very many. Alternate translation: “because of how many revelations I received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1368	12:7	hu8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1369	12:7	q5e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul speaks as if a thorn was stabbing him in the flesh. He could mean that: (1) he had a sickness or ailment that affected his flesh, that is, his body. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, sickness,” (2) people opposed him and his ministry. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, people opposing me,” (3) a demon attacked him. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, a demon,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1370	12:7	q7lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄγγελος Σατανᾶ	1	Here Paul refers to a messenger or angel that came from or was sent by Satan, the devil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Satan’s angel” or “someone sent by Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1371	12:7	c09d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κολαφίζῃ	1	Here Paul speaks as if the messenger of Satan were physically buffeting or hitting him. He means that the messenger caused him to suffer in some physical way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “he might hurt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1372	12:7	ehp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἵνα μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι	2	Here most ancient manuscripts include the clause so that I would not become super arrogant. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts do not have this clause. Most likely, this clause was accidentally omitted because Paul had already said it once. So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1373	12:8	jbne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	Here, the word this could refer: (1) generally to what Paul described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this situation” (2) to the “messenger of Satan.” Alternate translation: “this messenger of Satan” (3) to the “thorn in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “this thorn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1374	12:8	n76p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὑπὲρ τούτου & ἵνα ἀποστῇ ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Here Paul refers both to what he begged the Lord about (this) and what he wanted the Lord to do (that he would remove {it} from me). If referring to both of these things would be redundant in your language, and if it would be helpful, you could combine about this with that he would remove {it} from me. Alternate translation: “that he would remove this from me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1375	12:8	wc7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποστῇ	1	Here, the subject of remove could be: (1) the Lord, who can remove the thorn and the suffering it causes. Alternate translation: “he would take it away” (2) the thorn, or messenger of Satan, which can remove itself from Paul. Alternate translation: “it would depart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1376	12:9	di10		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	εἴρηκέν μοι	1	Here Paul repeats what the Lord said in response to his prayer that the thorn and its suffering be taken away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the answer to a question or prayer. Alternate translation: “he has answered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1377	12:9	km91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	μοι, ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου, ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “to me that his grace is enough for me, for his power is being made perfect in weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1378	12:9	nr2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου, ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace, power, and weakness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “How I act graciously is enough for you, for when people are weak, I perfect how powerfully I work through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1379	12:9	axcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι	1	Because God is speaking to one person, Paul, the pronoun you in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1380	12:9	cs63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the Lord. Alternate translation: “for I make my power perfect in weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1381	12:9	t5um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μᾶλλον & ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις μου	1	Here, the phrase even more could indicate that Paul will: (1) boast more in his weaknesses than he has already. Alternate translation: “more than I already have in my weaknesses” (2) boast in his weaknesses rather than praying for the removal of the thorn. Alternate translation: “in my weaknesses rather than asking God to remove them” (3) boast in his weaknesses rather than in his strengths. Alternate translation: “in my weaknesses rather than in my strengths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1382	12:9	usod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις μου, ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of weaknesses and power, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about how weak I am so that Christ will reside upon me to empower me” or “in how weak I am so that Christ will give his power to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1383	12:9	adcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe power that comes from Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1384	12:9	g8mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	Here Paul speaks as if the power of Christ were a person who could reside in or upon Paul, who is pictured like a tent or house. He means that the power of Christ consistently becomes part of his life and is something that he can always have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might live in me” or “might always be with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1385	12:10	pxf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐδοκῶ	1	Here Paul means that he is content with these bad experiences and is even happy that he experiences them, because Christ works through him when these bad things happen. He does not mean that he enjoys the bad experiences themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I rejoice when I live” or “I am content to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1386	12:10	s5sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas in this clause, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being weak, in being insulted, in being coerced, in being persecuted and distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1387	12:10	xl8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the phrase for the sake of Christ could go with: (1) the entire list of bad experiences. Alternate translation: “in weaknesses, in insults, in hardships, in persecutions and distresses whenever I experience them for the sake of Christ” (2) the verb take delight. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ in weaknesses, in insults, in hardships, in persecutions and distresses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1388	12:10	t7qg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul takes delight in these bad experiences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “that is because” or “I do that since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1389	12:11	a1ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γέγονα ἄφρων	1	Here Paul means that he has spoken in foolish ways in the previous several chapters. He does not mean that he is always a foolish person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I have been talking in foolish ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1390	12:11	pzw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε	1	Here Paul means is that reason why he had to speak in foolish ways is that the Corinthians were behaving wrongly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the way you are acting has compelled me to do so” or “how you are behaving has made me act this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1391	12:11	bkxl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε	1	Here, the word translated yourselves emphasizes you. Consider using a natural way to emphasize you in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed compelled me” or “it is you who compelled me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1392	12:11	c25h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces an explanation of how the Corinthians compelled Paul to be foolish. He goes on to explain that they should have been commending him, but they have not done so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “You compelled me because, although it has not happened,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1393	12:11	v2lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ & ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you ought to commend me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1394	12:11	rada		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑστέρησα	1	Here Paul could be using the past tense because: (1) he is referring to the time when he was with the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “when I visited you, I lacked” (2) he is speaking of what is generally true. Alternate translation: “I lack” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1395	12:11	h4d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν & ὑστέρησα τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative verb lacked and the negative word nothing. Alternate translation: “I have everything that the ‘super-apostles’ have” or “I am just as good as the ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1396	12:11	s82x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	Here Paul refers to his opponents, the false teachers, with the words that they themselves or their followers used to describe them: “super-apostles”. He does not actually believe that these people are better apostles or greater than anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective to make a point. See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:5. Alternate translation: “of the so-called ‘super-apostles’” or “of those who consider themselves ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1397	12:11	v4xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrasting but true. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1398	12:11	ulah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐδέν εἰμι	1	Here Paul speaks as if he were actually nothing. What he means is that he himself is not great or powerful at all without Christ working through him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am worthless on my own” or “I myself have no power or authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1399	12:12	i6sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν	1	Here, the word translated Indeed could: (1) connect this sentence to the previous claim that Paul is equal to the “super-apostles.” You could use a word or phrase that links two statements, or you could leave Indeed untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” (2) introduce the first part of a contrast. In this case, Paul does not directly state the second half of the contrast. He would be implying that they did not pay attention to these signs. Alternate translation: “Although you did not pay attention to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1400	12:12	fgc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ & σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe signs that prove that someone is an apostle. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the signs that show that someone is an apostle” or “signs that go along with true apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1401	12:12	kp5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ & σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) he performed the signs. Alternate translation: “I performed the signs of an apostle” (2) God performed the signs through him. Alternate translation: “God performed the signs of an apostle through me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1402	12:12	t05n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ὑπομονῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “without ceasing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1403	12:12	dnle		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπομονῇ— σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν	1	Here, the list, both signs and wonders and miracles, could be: (1) examples of what the signs of an apostle were. Alternate translation: “endurance, which included both signs and wonders and miracles” (2) the ways in which Paul demonstrated the signs of an apostle. Alternate translation: “endurance, shown through signs and wonders and miracles” or “endurance with both signs and wonders and miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1404	12:12	d4um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν	1	Here Paul uses three similar words to describe supernatural acts that God empowered Paul to do. The word signs emphasizes that these acts reveal something; the word wonders emphasizes that these acts are amazing or unusual; the word miracles emphasizes that these acts are powerful. Paul uses these three words to show that he performed various acts that showed that he was an apostle. If your language does not have different words that emphasize these three aspects of the supernatural acts, you could combine two or all three of these words into one word or phrase and emphasize the variety in another way. Alternate translation: “many and various miracles” or “both many signs and various miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1405	12:13	aclx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Here, the word For introduces another reason why the Corinthians should consider Paul to be trustworthy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1406	12:13	sy7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν? χαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην!	1	Here Paul speaks from the perspective of his opponents, who tell the Corinthians that Paul has committed an injustice in treating them worse than the other churches by not asking them for money. He speaks from their perspective to show the Corinthians that this perspective is foolish and wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “people say that you were treated worse than the remaining churches because I myself did not burden you. If that is true, you need to forgive me for this injustice.” or “what is the way that you were treated worse than the remaining churches? The only way I treated you differently was by not burdening you. If people call that an injustice, please forgive me for it!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1407	12:13	z35e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν?	1	Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that he treated them like all the other churches except for not asking for money. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or a negation. Alternate translation: “I did not treat you worse than the remaining churches except that I myself did not burden you.” or “Besides not burdening you, I treated you just as well as the remaining churches.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1408	12:13	tctz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “beyond the fact that I myself did not burden you, what is the way that you were treated worse than the remaining churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
1409	12:13	pr0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡσσώθητε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “I treated you worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1410	12:13	skav		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Here Paul refers to the other churches that he works with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to other churches that Paul knows and helps. Alternate translation: “the other churches that I serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1411	12:13	d426		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy burden that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:9. Alternate translation: “I myself did not trouble you” or “I myself did not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1412	12:13	k7a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1	Here, the word translated myself emphasizes I. Consider using a natural way to emphasize I in your language. Alternate translation: “I, for one,” or “I indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1413	12:13	u1w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of injustice, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for acting unjustly” or “for doing what is unjust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1414	12:14	g8mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “Listen to this” or “Hear this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1415	12:14	ngzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ καταναρκήσω	1	Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy burden that he could have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:13. Alternate translation: “I will not trouble you” or “I will not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1416	12:14	vqbg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For introduces a reason why Paul will not burden the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “I will not burden you, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1417	12:14	qchp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ ὑμῶν, ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul contrasts the things that the Corinthians have, or their possessions, with the Corinthians themselves. What he means is that he does not want the money and possessions that the Corinthians have. Instead, he wants the Corinthians themselves; that is, he wants them to trust him and Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “the things you own, but your loyalty” or “your possessions, but your trust in the Messiah and in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1418	12:14	ugk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I seek you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1419	12:14	pzkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2	Here, the word For introduces an example that illustrates why Paul acts as he does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example. Alternate translation: “As an illustration of this,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1420	12:14	zsq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ γὰρ ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν, ἀλλὰ οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “For the parents should store up for the children, not the children for the parents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1421	12:14	ne5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ γὰρ ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν, ἀλλὰ οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις	1	Here Paul speaks of himself as a parent and the Corinthians as his children. In Paul’s culture, parents generally saved money for their children to use. Paul uses this custom to illustrate how he, as a parent, should be giving to the Corinthians instead of the Corinthians, as children, giving to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking of himself as a parent and the Corinthians as children. Alternate translation: “For children, like you, should not store up for your parents, like me. Rather, the parents, like me, should store up for the children, like you.” or “For I am like your parent, and you are like my children. Children should not store up for the parent, but the parent for the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1422	12:14	wd97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the parents should store up for the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1423	12:15	s237		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word Now introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1424	12:15	vj2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι	1	Here Paul speaks as if his energy, time, and even he himself were money that he or someone else could spend. He means that he is willing to use all his energy and time and even to experience hardships and difficulties to help the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will most gladly exhaust everything I have and be completely exhausted” or “I will most gladly use all my resources and be completely worn out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1425	12:15	kqgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) experiences and other people do it to him. Alternate translation: “allow other people to completely spend me” or “let external things completely spend me” (2) he does it to himself. Alternate translation: “completely wear myself out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1426	12:15	nk8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1	Here, the phrase your souls represents the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your sake” or “for the sake of your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1427	12:15	t3na		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι?	1	Paul is using the question form to rebuke the Corinthians for loving him less when he loves them more abundantly. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a rebuke or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since I love you more abundantly, I should not be loved less.” or “Given that I love you more abundantly, I should not be loved less!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1428	12:15	e16a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἀγαπῶν	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I love” or “Given that I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1429	12:15	gjbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀγαπῶν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read loving. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “I love.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1430	12:15	j887		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσοτέρως & ἧσσον	1	Here Paul uses two comparison words without indicating exactly what he is comparing. He could mean that: (1) his love is increasing in comparison to the Corinthians’ love, which is decreasing. Alternate translation: “more than ever … less than ever” (2) he has much love, while the Corinthians have little love. Alternate translation: “greatly … only a little” (3) his love for them is greater than his love for other churches, while the Corinthians love him less than other churches do. Alternate translation: “more abundantly than I love other churches … less than they love me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1431	12:15	u9y0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “am I to receive less love” or “are you going to love me less” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1432	12:16	gvv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔστω δέ, ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα ὑμᾶς; ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the phrase But let it be {so} indicates that something is agreed upon or certainly true. Paul could be referring to: (1) what he is about to say about not being a burden to the Corinthians. He means that he and the Corinthians can agree about that. Alternate translation: “But here is what we can agree on: I myself did not burden you. However” (2) what he said in the previous verse about loving the Corinthians, although he may be loved less. He means that even if that is true, he will still not burden the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “Besides all that, I myself did not burden you. However,” or “Even if that has happened, I myself did not burden you. However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1433	12:16	binl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα	1	Here, the word translated myself emphasizes I. Consider using a natural way to emphasize I in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed did not burden” or “as for me, I did not burden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1434	12:16	mnvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα ὑμᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy burden that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:14. Alternate translation: “I myself did not trouble you” or “I myself did not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1435	12:16	jl3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον	1	Here Paul speaks from the perspective of either the Corinthians of the opponents. They may think or say that Paul was crafty and caught them by deceit. He speaks from their perspective so that he can respond to this claim in the following verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “but someone may say that I, being crafty, caught you by deceit” or “but you may think that I caught you by deceit, being crafty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1436	12:16	ur5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον	1	Here Paul speaks of deceiving or tricking the Corinthians as if he were physically grabbing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See the similar phrase “takes advantage” in 11:20. Alternate translation: “I took advantage of you” or “I cheated you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1437	12:16	so24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόλῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deceit, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by being deceitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1438	12:17	vb7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς?	1	Paul is using the question form to deny that any person he has sent to the Corinthians has cheated them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a negation or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I have not taken advantage of you through anyone whom I have sent to you!” or “There is no one whom I have sent to you through whom I took advantage of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1439	12:17	nex4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ	1	Although the term him is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Most likely any person whom Paul sent would be a man, but Paul is not making this claim. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “him or her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1440	12:18	psbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσα Τίτον καὶ συναπέστειλα τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	Here Paul refers to a trip Titus took previously to visit the Corinthians. He is probably referring to the visit he mentions in 8:6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to a trip that has already been completed. Alternate translation: “I urged Titus to go to you previously, and I sent the other brother with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1441	12:18	urtj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	Here Paul assumes that the Corinthians know who this brother is, so he does not name him. Since we do not know who this person was, you should not make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a brother” or “the brother you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1442	12:18	kmt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	Paul is using the term brother to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the other believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1443	12:18	pjl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος?	1	Paul is using the question form to remind the Corinthians that Titus did not take advantage of them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You remember that Titus did not take advantage of you.” or “Titus did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1444	12:18	rjiy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?	1	Paul is using the question form to remind the Corinthians that Titus behaved in the same ways that Paul did. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “You remember that we walked in the same spirit, and we walked in the same footsteps.” or “We walked in the same spirit! We walked in the same footsteps!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1445	12:18	k6b3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & περιεπατήσαμεν οὐ	1	Here, the word we refers to Titus and Paul only. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Did Titus and I not walk … Did Titus and I not walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1446	12:18	acg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν	1	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Did we not behave according to the same spirit” or “Did we not live in the same spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1447	12:18	f4e0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι	1	Here, the word spirit could refer to: (1) the spirit of a person, which refers to the inner life of a person, that is, how that person thinks, feels, and makes decisions. Alternate translation: “in the same mind” or “in the same heart” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the same Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1448	12:18	oket		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?	1	Here Paul speaks as if he and Titus walked on the same path so closely together that the person walking behind stepped in the footsteps of the person in front. He means that they did and said very similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Did we not act in the same ways” or “Did we not behave in very similar ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1449	12:19	g1iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα?	1	Paul is using the question form to deny that what he has said is primarily for the purpose of defending ourselves. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you!” or “I want you to realize that all of this time we have not been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1450	12:19	m3vx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλαι	1	Here, the phrase all of this time refers to everything that Paul has written so far in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “throughout this letter” or “while you listened to what we have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1451	12:19	ih3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι Θεοῦ	1	Here, just as with the phrase “in the presence of God” in 2:17, the phrase Before God could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers speak as they do because they know that God sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “As God desires” or “With God watching” (2) Paul and his fellow workers speak with God as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “With God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1452	12:19	hcor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains that Paul and his fellow workers speak from their perspective as those united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in union with Christ” or “and because of being united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1453	12:19	y0fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ & πάντα	1	Here, the phrase all these things refers primarily to what Paul has written in this letter so far. However, it also includes everything that Paul and his fellow workers say and do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things we say and do, including in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1454	12:19	oqmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγαπητοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1455	12:19	vg3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:8. Alternate translation: “are to help you become more faithful to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1456	12:20	fqdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word For could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul has written what he has in this letter. Alternate translation: “I have written these things because” (2) a reason why Paul wants to build them up. Alternate translation: “I want to build you up because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1457	12:20	cu6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχ οἵους θέλω & οἷον οὐ θέλετε	1	Here Paul refers to how both he and the Corinthians have ideas about how they think the other person should be behaving. He fears that these ideas will not be accurate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “not such as I expect … not such as you expect” or “not what I want you to be like … not what you want me to be like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1458	12:20	zy6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	θέλετε; μή πως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you wish; I fear that somehow there may be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1459	12:20	aw5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μή πως ἔρις	1	Here Paul implies that they are doing all these wrong things within their own group. He does not mean that they are doing these things to people outside their group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “that, within your group, somehow there may be quarreling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1460	12:20	rh1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for any of the ideas in this list, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that somehow you may be quarrelsome, jealous, angry, competitive, slanderous, gossiping, proud, and disruptive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1461	12:21	ddw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (see 12:20). Alternate translation: “and I fear that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1462	12:21	blba		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	πάλιν ἐλθόντος μου, ταπεινώσῃ με ὁ Θεός μου	1	Here the word again could go with: (1) I come. In this case, Paul is speaking about how he plans to visit the Corinthians a third time. Alternate translation: “when I come yet again, my God might humble me” (2) God might humble me. In this case, Paul means that God may humble him again, just as he did when Paul visited the Corinthians previously (see 2:1). Alternate translation: “when I come, my God might humble me again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1463	12:21	ozce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταπεινώσῃ με ὁ Θεός μου πρὸς ὑμᾶς, καὶ	1	Here Paul could be implying that God will humble him: (1) because he would feel ashamed about how the Corinthians were acting. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me by making me feel shame about you, and” (2) because he would have to use his authority for tearing down instead of building up. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me before you by making me punish you, and” (3) because he would mourn publicly. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me before you because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1464	12:21	knmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὁ Θεός μου	1	When Paul speaks of my God, he does not mean that this is a different God than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this God is his God. If the phrase my God sounds like it makes a distinction between Paul’s God and the Corinthians’ God, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the God I serve” or “our God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1465	12:21	hq1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ	1	The terms impurity, sexual immorality, and debauchery mean similar things. Paul is using the three terms together to include all types of sexual sin. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with two words or a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the debauchery and sexual immorality” or “the many kinds of sexual immorality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1466	12:21	rh22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ, ᾗ ἔπραξαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of impurity, immorality, and debauchery, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “from acting in impure ways and doing sexually immoral things and enjoying indecent actions” or “from acting in impure and sexually immoral and indecent ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1467	13:intro	abcg				0
1468	13:1	slj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Only if two or three people have said the same thing about another person should God’s people believe that it is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1469	13:1	xfhc			ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα	1	Paul is quoting here from Deuteronomy 19:15. He has been accusing the Corinthian believers of doing wrong, and so he compares the number of his visits, during which he has observed and will observe this wrong behavior, with the number of witnesses that the Old Testament required for convicting someone of doing wrong. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote.
1470	13:1	gs3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ στόματος	1	Paul is using the term mouth to mean the words that people say by using their mouths. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression from your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the word” or “on the testimony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1471	13:2	fxl6			τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν	1	Alternate translation: “to all of you other believers”
1472	13:2	ijip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ἔλθω	1	Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that he does intend to come again to Corinth. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1473	13:2	kfzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ φείσομαι	1	The implication is that, when Paul comes, he will punish any believer there who is continuing to live sinfully. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I will not withhold punishment from anyone who is sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1474	13:2	da34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ φείσομαι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb spare. Alternate translation: “I will certainly punish everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1475	13:3	svtr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμὴν ζητεῖτε τοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of proof, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you want me to prove that Christ speaks through me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1476	13:3	kiw2			ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος	1	Alternate translation: “speaking through me”
1477	13:3	ffwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς	1	The pronoun who refers to Christ. If this is not clear for your readers, you could include “Christ” here. Alternate translation: “Christ, who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1478	13:3	vd3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ δυνατεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	The implication is that Christ will be powerful among the Corinthian believers when Paul comes and disciplines them using Christ’s power. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “but will punish you powerfully when I come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1479	13:4	a1bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ & ἐσταυρώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1480	13:4	rha6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀσθενείας	-1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weakness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when he was weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1481	13:4	kh0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ δυνάμεως Θεοῦ	-1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God works powerfully … because God works powerfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1482	13:4	ezsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦμεν ἐν αὐτῷ	-1	Here, Paul is speaking of his relationship to Christ as if he were inside of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are weak as we imitate him” or “are weak, just as he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1483	13:5	ybkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἑαυτοὺς πειράζετε & ἑαυτοὺς δοκιμάζετε	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If your language does not have two ways to say this, you could repeat the same phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Test yourselves … Indeed, you must test yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1484	13:5	z2oq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοὺς	-1	The word translated yourselves is plural, referring to all of the Corinthian believers. However, the meaning is that each believer is to examine himself, not that they should examine each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as singular, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1485	13:5	q28n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	Here, Paul is speaking of faith as if it were something which the Corinthians could be inside. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you truly believe in the Messiah” or “you are being faithful to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1486	13:5	qvxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ ἐπιγινώσκετε ἑαυτοὺς, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μήτι ἀδόκιμοί ἐστε	1	Paul is using the question form here to emphasize to the Corinthian believers something that is true: that Jesus Christ does live in them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know that it is Jesus Christ himself who lives within you—unless you are not in the faith.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1487	13:5	sbx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, in you could mean: (1) Jesus is intimately connected to each believing individual, as if Jesus were living inside each person. Alternate translation: “part of who you are” (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group. Alternate translation: “among you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1488	13:6	xk7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐλπίζω	1	Paul speaks as if he were uncertain about whether or not the Corinthian believers would understand that he is a true follower or apostle of Christ. He does this in order to convey modesty, but he is actually sure that they know that he is a true follower of Christ. If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying here is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I am sure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1489	13:6	f8o8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & ἐσμὲν	1	Here the word ourselves emphasizes that Paul is talking about his apostolic team, who introduced the Corinthian believers to Jesus Christ. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “we, yes, we, are” or “we, who serve Jesus, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1490	13:6	fqbe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς & ἐσμὲν	1	Paul is referring here to himself and his apostolic team, who introduced the Corinthian believers to Jesus Christ. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we, the very ones who brought you to Christ, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1491	13:6	zhkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἐσμὲν ἀδόκιμοι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative word unapproved. Alternate translation: “we ourselves are approved” or “we ourselves live as one with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1492	13:6	i34s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἐσμὲν ἀδόκιμοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the testing or approving, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “we ourselves have passed this test” or “God has accepted us ourselves as his own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1493	13:7	pu5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Paul is using the word translated Now to introduce a slightly new topic. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this, or it may be more natural to leave it out. Alternate translation: “Also,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1494	13:7	u75e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative word wrong. Alternate translation: “you may do everything right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1495	13:7	kmld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς δόκιμοι φανῶμεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in these ways, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the actions, it is people in general who do the seeing and either God or people who do the approving. Alternate translation: “people see that, for our part, God approves of us” or “people see our work with you and approve of us, the workers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1496	13:7	gt2e			δόκιμοι	1	Alternate translation: “having gained God’s approval”
1497	13:7	wcrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & ὑμεῖς & ἡμεῖς	1	Paul uses the words ourselves and yourselves to emphasize the difference between his thinking and the thinking of the Corinthian believers. He wants only good for them, while they suspect that he wants only good for himself. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. If you use the following suggestion, it will need a comma before each phrase. Alternate translation: “on our part, … on your part, … on our part,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1498	13:7	yiww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς δὲ ὡς ἀδόκιμοι ὦμεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the approving, it is either God or people in general. Alternate translation: “even if it seems that God has not approved of us ourselves” or “even if people think that we ourselves have had no part in your success” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1499	13:8	bqd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The word translated as For indicates that what follows is a reason for what came before. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that what follows is a reason for what came before. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1500	13:8	jvke		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀληθείας	-1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God’s true message … God’s true message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1501	13:9	vt7b			τὴν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν	1	Alternate translation: “that you may become spiritually mature”
1502	13:9	kr1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The word translated as For here indicates that what follows continues to give another reason, along with verse 8, for the statement of verse 7. Use a connector that indicates that this is another reason, if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1503	13:9	h8h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & ὑμεῖς	1	Here, as in verse 7, the words ourselves and yourselves emphasize the difference between Paul and the Corinthian believers. He wants them to be strong in the Lord, and it doesn’t matter if people think that he is weak. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. If you use the following suggestion, it will need a comma before each phrase. Alternate translation: “on our part, … on your part,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1504	13:9	ep5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο καὶ εὐχόμεθα	1	The pronoun this here refers to what Paul desires for the Corinthian believers, which he states in two ways. First, that they be powerful in serving God, and then for their restoration to a right relationship with God. Those are both the same thing. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “In fact, we pray for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1505	13:10	kbpp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The pronoun this refers to what Paul has just written in verse 9, that he wants the Corinthian believers to be restored to a right relationship with God. If this is not clear for your readers, you could repeat that information here. Alternate translation: “Because I want you to be restored to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1506	13:10	dqu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	The words these things refer to what Paul has written in the entire letter, but especially to the warnings and exhortations in chapters 10-13. If this is not clear for your readers, you could include that information here. Alternate translation: “the things in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1507	13:10	kzue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἣν ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκέν μοι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as the person that the Lord has authorized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1508	13:10	rlm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν.	1	Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help you become more faithful to Christ and not to make you want to forsake him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1509	13:11	bdql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1510	13:11	fm8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταρτίζεσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated a form of this word at the end of verse 9. Alternate translation: “Work toward maturity” or “Decide to trust and obey God completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1511	13:11	nfyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρακαλεῖσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the encouraging could be: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “allow me to encourage you” (2) God. Alternate translation: “receive encouragement from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1512	13:11	diw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε	1	Here, think the same means to agree on the most important things and to not argue about the lesser things. Alternate translation: “make sure that you all agree on what is important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1513	13:11	axul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρηνεύετε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “be peaceful with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1514	13:11	vrfk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης	1	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as being characterized by love and peace. This probably means both that God is the source of love and peace and also that he enables his people to have love and peace. Try to include both meanings, if possible. Alternate translation: “God, who gives love and peace,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1515	13:11	t9io		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of love and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God, who empowers you to love and to be peaceful,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1516	13:12	p1nh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι	1	A holy kiss was a symbolic action to show familial love between believers. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. The idea of a holy kiss is that it be a greeting that is appropriate in the culture, whether it be a kiss, a hug, a handshake, or something else, and also that it be holy, that is, appropriate between God’s people. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “warmly, as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1517	13:12	x2qd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἅγιοι	1	These saints are the fellow believers who are there with Paul. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “your fellow believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1518	13:13	qodb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	Paul ends his letter with this blessing. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray for all of you that the Lord Jesus Christ will give you his grace, that God will give you his love, and that the Holy Spirit will give you his fellowship.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1519	13:13	st07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace, love, and fellowship, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus Christ continue to be gracious to you, may God continue to love you, and may the Holy Spirit unite you all closely together as believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])